1 #LyX 2.2 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
72 \default_output_format pdf2
74 \bibtex_command bibtex
75 \index_command default
79 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
80 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
84 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
85 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
86 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
91 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
92 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
95 \use_package amsmath 1
96 \use_package amssymb 1
99 \use_package mathdots 1
100 \use_package mathtools 0
101 \use_package mhchem 1
102 \use_package stackrel 0
103 \use_package stmaryrd 0
104 \use_package undertilde 0
106 \cite_engine_type default
110 \paperorientation portrait
114 \notefontcolor #0000ff
131 \paragraph_separation skip
133 \quotes_language english
136 \paperpagestyle default
137 \tracking_changes false
138 \output_changes false
152 by the \SpecialChar LyX
157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
159 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
160 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
161 Documentation mailing list:
162 \begin_inset CommandInset href
164 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
175 \begin_inset Newline newline
179 \begin_inset Newline newline
183 \begin_inset Note Note
186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
187 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
188 \begin_inset Newline newline
193 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
194 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
202 \begin_layout Standard
203 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
204 LatexCommand tableofcontents
211 \begin_layout Chapter
215 \begin_layout Section
216 What is \SpecialChar LyX
220 \begin_layout Standard
222 is a document preparation system.
223 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
224 scripts, publishable books, business
225 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
226 It is unlike most other
227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
234 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
236 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
252 pt type, left justified, 5
253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
262 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
266 \begin_layout Standard
267 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
272 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
276 \begin_layout Standard
281 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
282 's philosophy: most importantly,
283 the format of all of the manuals.
284 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
285 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
291 manual describes that, too.
294 \begin_layout Section
299 \begin_layout Standard
300 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
301 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
303 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
304 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
308 \begin_layout Standard
309 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
310 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
311 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
313 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
314 only a vertical scrollbar.
315 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
316 The first case is large images.
317 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
318 image and use the option
329 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
332 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
333 this doesn't work for equations yet.
336 \begin_layout Standard
337 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
338 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
344 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
346 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
353 \begin_layout Section
357 \begin_layout Standard
358 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
360 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
362 Just select the manual you want to read from the
369 \begin_layout Section
370 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
372 \begin_inset CommandInset label
374 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
381 \begin_layout Standard
382 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
383 can be configured via the menu
385 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
389 \begin_inset Index idx
392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
399 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
401 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
402 packages are available.
403 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
405 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
407 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
408 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
412 \begin_inset space \space{}
415 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
416 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
418 To force \SpecialChar LyX
419 to re-inspect your system, you should use
421 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
425 \begin_inset Index idx
428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
429 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
435 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
436 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
439 \begin_layout Section
442 \begin_inset CommandInset label
444 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
451 \begin_layout Standard
452 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
453 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
454 installed, but you will not be
455 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
456 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
457 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
458 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
459 document can always be output as plain text
463 \begin_layout Standard
464 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
465 or DocBook classes or packages.
466 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
467 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
470 \begin_layout Standard
471 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
472 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
473 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
476 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
484 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
485 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
488 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
492 \begin_inset Index idx
495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
496 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
504 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
511 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
515 \begin_layout Chapter
516 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
520 \begin_layout Section
521 Basic File Operations
522 \begin_inset Index idx
525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
534 \begin_layout Standard
539 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
540 in addition to some more advanced operations:
543 \begin_layout Itemize
565 \begin_layout Itemize
581 arg "buffer-new-template"
587 \begin_layout Itemize
609 \begin_layout Itemize
619 \begin_layout Itemize
633 \begin_layout Itemize
655 \begin_layout Itemize
667 arg "buffer-write-as"
673 \begin_layout Itemize
687 \begin_layout Itemize
701 \begin_layout Standard
702 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
703 a few minor differences.
706 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
717 command lists the available templates.
718 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
719 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
720 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
728 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
735 \begin_layout Standard
736 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
768 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
769 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
770 is just that — a big, blank space.
778 \begin_layout Standard
799 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
804 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
807 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
825 will reload the document from disk.
826 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
827 and want to restore it to the last save.
836 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
837 them as your changes.
840 \begin_layout Section
841 Basic Editing Features
842 \begin_inset Index idx
845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
852 \begin_inset CommandInset label
854 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
861 \begin_layout Standard
862 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
863 can perform cut and paste operations
864 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
865 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
866 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
867 editing features and how to access
869 We will start with cut and paste.
872 \begin_layout Standard
873 As you might expect, the
877 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
878 various other editing features.
879 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
883 \begin_layout Itemize
889 \begin_inset Index idx
892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
921 \begin_layout Itemize
927 \begin_inset Index idx
930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
959 \begin_layout Itemize
965 \begin_inset Index idx
968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
993 \begin_layout Itemize
1003 \begin_layout Itemize
1007 \begin_inset space ~
1013 \begin_layout Itemize
1017 \begin_inset space ~
1021 \begin_inset space ~
1027 \begin_inset Index idx
1030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1039 \begin_inset Index idx
1042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1057 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1067 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1073 \begin_layout Standard
1074 The first three are self-explanatory.
1075 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1076 and other programs by
1097 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1098 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1103 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1104 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1105 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1106 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1107 into individual cells.
1111 \begin_inset space ~
1116 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1117 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1121 \begin_layout Standard
1125 \begin_inset space ~
1130 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1132 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1134 \begin_inset space ~
1141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1147 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1148 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1149 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1151 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1155 \begin_inset space \space{}
1158 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1159 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1162 \begin_inset space ~
1165 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1167 \begin_inset space ~
1171 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1175 \begin_inset space ~
1184 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1185 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1187 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1191 \begin_inset space ~
1196 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1197 start a new paragraph.
1198 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1199 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1204 \begin_inset space ~
1207 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1209 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1213 \begin_inset space ~
1221 \begin_inset space ~
1224 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1227 paste from the primary selection.
1228 This is normally the currently selected text.
1231 \begin_layout Standard
1234 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1236 \begin_inset space ~
1240 \begin_inset space ~
1248 \begin_inset space ~
1252 \begin_inset space ~
1258 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1264 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1267 \begin_inset space ~
1276 \begin_inset space ~
1281 button to skip the current word.
1285 \begin_inset space ~
1290 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1294 \begin_inset space ~
1299 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1301 If the toggle is set, searching for
1302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1313 will not match the word
1314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1328 Match whole words only
1330 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1331 to only find complete words, e.
1332 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1336 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1361 offers also an advanced
1364 \begin_inset space ~
1368 \begin_inset space ~
1373 feature that is described in section
1374 \begin_inset space ~
1378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1380 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1387 \begin_layout Standard
1388 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1389 \begin_inset space \space{}
1393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1401 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1403 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1408 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1415 \begin_layout Standard
1419 arg "inset-select-all"
1422 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1423 When the cursor is inside an inset
1426 arg "inset-select-all"
1429 selects the content of the inset.
1433 arg "inset-select-all"
1436 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1441 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1444 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1448 \begin_layout Section
1450 \begin_inset Index idx
1453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1460 \begin_inset Index idx
1463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1470 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1472 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1479 \begin_layout Standard
1480 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1482 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1485 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1488 or the toolbar button
1494 to undo some mistake.
1495 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1497 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1500 or the toolbar button
1507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1514 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1515 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1518 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1521 \begin_layout Standard
1522 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1531 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1532 This is a consequence of the 100
1533 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1536 step undo limit mentioned above.
1539 \begin_layout Standard
1548 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1550 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1554 \begin_layout Section
1556 \begin_inset Index idx
1559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1568 \begin_layout Standard
1569 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1572 \begin_layout Enumerate
1577 \begin_layout Itemize
1582 once anywhere in the edit window.
1583 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1587 \begin_layout Enumerate
1592 \begin_layout Itemize
1599 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1602 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1605 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1606 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1609 \begin_layout Itemize
1610 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1613 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1620 \begin_layout Enumerate
1621 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1625 \begin_layout Standard
1626 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1627 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1631 \begin_layout Section
1633 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1635 name "sec:Navigating"
1640 \begin_inset Index idx
1643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1652 \begin_layout Standard
1654 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1657 \begin_layout Itemize
1662 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1663 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1666 \begin_layout Itemize
1667 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1669 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1671 \begin_inset space ~
1676 or by the toolbar button
1679 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1685 \begin_layout Itemize
1686 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1688 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1691 and use the same menu to return to them.
1692 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1695 \begin_layout Standard
1699 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1704 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1705 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1707 \begin_inset space ~
1712 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1713 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1714 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1715 your last editing position.
1718 \begin_layout Standard
1723 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1727 \begin_layout Subsection
1729 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1731 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1736 \begin_inset Index idx
1739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1740 Navigating ! Outline
1746 \begin_inset Index idx
1749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1758 \begin_layout Standard
1759 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1760 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1761 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1763 \begin_inset space ~
1767 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1769 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1773 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1774 \begin_inset space ~
1778 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1780 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1785 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1789 \begin_layout Standard
1790 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1791 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1792 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1793 dialog and to modify the citation.
1796 \begin_layout Standard
1797 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1799 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1800 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1808 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1811 \begin_layout Standard
1812 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1813 you further to control the display.
1818 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1819 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1825 option keeps it in the current view state.
1826 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1827 \begin_inset space ~
1830 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1831 \begin_inset space ~
1834 3, the subsections of sections
1835 \begin_inset space ~
1838 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1843 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1844 \begin_inset space ~
1848 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1858 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1861 \begin_layout Standard
1868 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1869 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1883 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1884 So, for example, you can move section
1885 \begin_inset space ~
1889 \begin_inset space ~
1892 2.4 or after section
1893 \begin_inset space ~
1898 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1911 (or the corresponding key bindings
1919 ) you can change the level of sections.
1920 So you can for example make section
1921 \begin_inset space ~
1925 \begin_inset space ~
1929 \begin_inset space ~
1935 \begin_layout Standard
1936 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
1937 section to copy, cut or delete it.
1940 \begin_layout Subsection
1941 Horizontal Scrolling
1942 \begin_inset Index idx
1945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1946 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1954 \begin_layout Standard
1956 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1958 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1962 \begin_inset space \space{}
1966 \begin_inset space ~
1969 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1970 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1971 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1975 \begin_layout Standard
1976 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1980 \begin_layout Itemize
1982 is used on a small tablet computer
1985 \begin_layout Itemize
1986 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
1990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1998 \begin_inset space ~
2011 \begin_layout Itemize
2012 Math constructs with long command names
2015 \begin_layout Standard
2016 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2017 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2019 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2020 windows so that table
2021 \begin_inset space ~
2025 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2027 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2032 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2034 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2035 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2038 \begin_layout Standard
2039 \begin_inset Float table
2045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2046 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2049 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2051 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2055 Horizontal scrolling test.
2063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2065 \begin_inset Tabular
2066 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2067 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2068 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2069 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2070 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2112 \begin_layout Section
2113 Input/Word Completion
2114 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2116 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2121 \begin_inset Index idx
2124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2131 \begin_inset Index idx
2134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2165 \begin_layout Standard
2167 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2169 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2170 is used to propose completions.
2173 \begin_layout Standard
2174 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2177 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2182 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2189 \begin_inset space ~
2193 \begin_inset space ~
2198 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2202 \begin_inset space ~
2207 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2208 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2212 \begin_inset space ~
2218 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2219 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2220 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2221 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2224 \begin_layout Standard
2226 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2227 completions available.
2232 key to accept a proposed completion.
2233 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2234 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2235 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2242 \begin_layout Standard
2243 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2244 ing options for text.
2245 The special math option
2249 enables characters to be composed.
2250 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2251 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2254 , you can then input the characters
2255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2266 to a formula to get it.
2267 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2268 of the math toolbar.
2269 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2273 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2274 's installation folder.
2275 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2284 \begin_layout Section
2286 \begin_inset Index idx
2289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2296 \begin_inset Index idx
2299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2328 \begin_inset Index idx
2331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2362 \begin_layout Standard
2363 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2377 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2380 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2384 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2385 \begin_inset space ~
2389 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2391 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2398 \begin_layout Standard
2402 \begin_inset space ~
2410 \begin_inset space ~
2431 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2435 \begin_layout Labeling
2436 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2440 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2441 LatexCommand nomenclature
2443 description "Tabulator key"
2449 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2451 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2452 \begin_inset space ~
2456 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2458 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2463 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2465 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2469 , especially section
2470 \begin_inset space ~
2474 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2476 reference "subsec:Lists"
2482 If you are still confused, look in the
2487 \begin_inset Newline newline
2495 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2496 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2500 \begin_layout Labeling
2501 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2505 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2506 LatexCommand nomenclature
2508 description "Escape key"
2515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2522 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2523 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2526 \begin_layout Labeling
2527 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2533 \begin_inset space ~
2537 \begin_inset space ~
2544 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2545 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2549 \begin_layout Standard
2550 There are three modifier keys:
2553 \begin_layout Labeling
2554 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2572 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2573 LatexCommand nomenclature
2575 description "Control key"
2579 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2580 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2584 \begin_layout Itemize
2593 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2596 \begin_layout Itemize
2605 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2608 \begin_layout Itemize
2617 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2621 \begin_layout Labeling
2622 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2640 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2641 LatexCommand nomenclature
2643 description "Shift key"
2647 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2648 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2651 \begin_layout Labeling
2652 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2670 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2671 LatexCommand nomenclature
2673 description "Alt or Meta key"
2677 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2678 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2679 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2685 \begin_inset Newline newline
2688 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2690 menu accelerator keys
2693 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2694 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2698 \begin_layout Standard
2699 For example, the sequence
2700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2706 \begin_inset space ~
2710 \begin_inset space ~
2716 \begin_inset space ~
2724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2732 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2743 \begin_inset space ~
2749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2759 \begin_layout Standard
2764 manual lists all other things bound to the
2772 \begin_layout Standard
2773 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2775 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2776 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2777 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2778 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2779 The \SpecialChar LyX
2780 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2781 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2782 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2784 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2793 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2800 followed by a capital
2807 \begin_layout Chapter
2810 \begin_inset Index idx
2813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2823 \begin_layout Section
2825 \begin_inset Index idx
2828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2837 \begin_layout Subsection
2841 \begin_layout Standard
2842 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2843 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2844 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2845 numbering schemes, and so on.
2846 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2847 and format the title of your document differently.
2850 \begin_layout Standard
2855 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2856 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2857 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2858 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2859 picks one for you by default.
2860 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2863 \begin_layout Subsection
2865 \begin_inset Index idx
2868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2875 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2877 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2884 \begin_layout Standard
2885 You can select a class using the
2887 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2888 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2892 \begin_inset Index idx
2895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2902 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2906 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2910 \begin_layout Standard
2911 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2916 \begin_layout Description
2917 Article for basic articles
2920 \begin_layout Description
2921 Report for basic reports
2924 \begin_layout Description
2925 Book for writing a book
2928 \begin_layout Description
2929 Letter for US-style letters
2932 \begin_layout Standard
2933 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2934 only uses if you have installed
2935 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2936 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2937 distributions will include
2939 Here are some of the classes.
2940 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2942 Special Document Classes
2951 \begin_layout Description
2952 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2955 \begin_layout Description
2956 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2960 \begin_layout Description
2961 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2965 \begin_layout Description
2966 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2967 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2968 There are three article layouts available.
2969 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2970 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2971 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2972 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2974 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2977 sequential numbering
2978 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2981 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2982 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2983 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2984 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2987 \begin_layout Description
2988 Beamer Layout for presentations
2991 \begin_layout Description
2992 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2993 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2994 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2995 with \SpecialChar LyX
2999 \begin_layout Description
3000 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3003 \begin_layout Description
3005 \begin_inset space ~
3008 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3011 \begin_layout Description
3012 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3015 \begin_layout Description
3016 Foils Used to make transparencies
3019 \begin_layout Description
3020 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3021 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3022 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3023 with \SpecialChar LyX
3027 \begin_layout Description
3028 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3029 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3032 \begin_layout Description
3033 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3036 \begin_layout Description
3037 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3040 \begin_layout Description
3041 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3042 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3043 (Is used by this document.)
3046 \begin_layout Description
3047 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3050 \begin_layout Description
3051 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3054 \begin_layout Description
3059 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3060 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3062 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3066 \begin_layout Description
3067 Slides Used to make transparencies
3070 \begin_layout Description
3072 \begin_inset space ~
3075 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3076 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3079 \begin_layout Description
3080 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3083 \begin_layout Standard
3084 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3086 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3088 Special Document Classes
3095 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3096 of the document classes.
3099 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3103 \begin_layout Standard
3104 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3106 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3107 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3109 \begin_inset Index idx
3112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3121 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3125 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3129 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3130 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3132 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3135 \begin_layout Standard
3138 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3143 , are highly specialized.
3145 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3146 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3147 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3148 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3149 by some document class.
3150 There are just too many of them.
3151 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3154 \begin_layout Standard
3155 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3156 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3160 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3163 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3164 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3165 document class for a new file.
3167 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3170 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3177 manual for information on how to install them.
3178 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3184 \begin_layout Standard
3185 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3186 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3187 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3188 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3189 class files to be used for dissertation
3190 s submitted to those universities.
3191 The \SpecialChar LyX
3192 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3194 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3198 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3204 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3207 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3209 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3211 name "subsec:Modules"
3216 \begin_inset Index idx
3219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3228 \begin_layout Standard
3229 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3230 chosen document class.
3231 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3232 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3239 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3243 \begin_inset Index idx
3246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3253 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3257 \begin_layout Standard
3258 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3259 packages or file format converters that are not always
3260 installed by default.
3262 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3263 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3264 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3265 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3267 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3268 file without the missing prerequisites.
3269 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3270 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3273 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3277 \begin_inset Index idx
3280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3281 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3287 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3292 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3295 \begin_layout Standard
3296 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3304 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3306 will advise you about these things.
3314 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3316 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3318 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3323 \begin_inset Index idx
3326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3327 Document ! Local Layout
3335 \begin_layout Standard
3336 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3337 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3338 : They are intended to be used in
3339 a variety of different documents.
3340 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3341 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3342 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3343 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3344 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3346 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3364 manual for information on how to use it.
3367 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3371 \begin_layout Standard
3372 Each class has a default set of options.
3373 Here's a quick table describing them:
3376 \begin_layout Standard
3377 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3383 \begin_layout Standard
3385 \begin_inset Tabular
3386 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3387 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3388 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3389 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3390 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3391 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3392 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3846 \begin_layout Standard
3847 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3853 \begin_layout Standard
3854 You're probably also wondering what
3855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3859 \begin_inset space ~
3863 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3867 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3868 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3873 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3878 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3888 headings, there are also
3896 headings, and so on.
3897 We will describe these headings fully in section
3898 \begin_inset space ~
3902 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3904 reference "subsec:Headings"
3911 \begin_layout Subsection
3913 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3915 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3920 \begin_inset Index idx
3923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3930 \begin_inset Index idx
3933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3942 \begin_layout Standard
3943 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3945 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3952 \begin_inset space ~
3960 \begin_inset space ~
3965 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3967 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3968 doesn't support special options you want to
3969 use for your document.
3970 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3971 -class and its options, you have to read
3975 \begin_layout Standard
3979 \begin_inset space ~
3986 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3992 \begin_inset space ~
3997 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3998 You can choose between the following five options:
4001 \begin_layout Labeling
4002 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4007 Use default page style of current class.
4010 \begin_layout Labeling
4011 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4016 No page numbers or headings.
4019 \begin_layout Labeling
4020 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4028 \begin_layout Labeling
4029 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4034 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4035 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4036 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4037 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4040 \begin_layout Labeling
4041 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4046 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4047 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4053 \begin_inset Index idx
4056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4058 -packages ! fancyhdr
4064 How they are defined is explained in section
4065 \begin_inset space ~
4069 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4071 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4078 \begin_layout Standard
4079 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4080 \begin_inset space ~
4084 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4086 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4093 \begin_layout Subsection
4094 Paper Size and Orientation
4095 \begin_inset Index idx
4098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4099 Document ! Paper size
4105 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4107 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4114 \begin_layout Standard
4115 You can find the following options in the menu
4118 \begin_inset space ~
4125 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4129 \begin_inset Index idx
4132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4141 \begin_layout Labeling
4142 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4146 \begin_inset space ~
4151 What size paper to print on.
4156 \begin_layout Itemize
4162 \begin_layout Itemize
4168 \begin_layout Itemize
4174 \begin_layout Itemize
4180 \begin_layout Itemize
4183 US letter, US legal, US executive
4186 \begin_layout Itemize
4192 \begin_layout Itemize
4199 \begin_layout Labeling
4200 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4205 To choose whether to output as
4216 \begin_layout Labeling
4217 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4221 \begin_inset space ~
4226 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4227 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4230 \begin_layout Subsection
4232 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4234 name "subsec:Margins"
4239 \begin_inset Index idx
4242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4249 \begin_inset Index idx
4252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4261 \begin_layout Standard
4262 Paper margins are set in the menu
4264 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4268 \begin_inset Index idx
4271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4280 \begin_layout Standard
4281 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4282 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4283 the paper format and the font size into account.
4286 \begin_layout Subsection
4290 \begin_layout Standard
4291 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4297 That includes the paragraph environments.
4298 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4299 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4300 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4302 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4311 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4313 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4314 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4315 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4318 \begin_layout Section
4319 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4320 \begin_inset Index idx
4323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4324 Paragraph ! Indentation
4332 \begin_layout Subsection
4334 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4336 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4343 \begin_layout Standard
4344 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4345 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4348 \begin_layout Standard
4349 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4350 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4351 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4352 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4356 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4362 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4363 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4364 language than English.
4366 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4369 \begin_layout Standard
4370 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4371 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4372 into \SpecialChar LyX
4374 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4377 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4379 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4380 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4381 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4388 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4389 goes to produce a printable file.
4394 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4396 gives you the ability globally to change
4400 these pre-coded spacings.
4401 We will explain more later.
4404 \begin_layout Subsection
4405 Paragraph Separation
4406 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4408 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4413 \begin_inset Index idx
4416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4417 Paragraph ! Separation
4425 \begin_layout Standard
4433 \begin_inset space ~
4441 \begin_inset space ~
4448 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4452 \begin_inset Index idx
4455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4461 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4464 \begin_layout Subsection
4468 \begin_layout Standard
4469 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4472 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4474 \begin_inset space ~
4479 dialog and toggle the
4482 \begin_inset space ~
4487 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4490 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4494 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4495 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4499 \begin_layout Standard
4500 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4501 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4504 \begin_layout Subsection
4506 \begin_inset Index idx
4509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4510 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4518 \begin_layout Standard
4521 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4525 \begin_inset Index idx
4528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4537 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4541 \begin_inset space ~
4550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4551 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4557 \begin_inset Index idx
4560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4562 -packages ! setspace
4567 installed to use this feature.
4572 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4574 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4576 \begin_inset space ~
4581 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4582 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4585 \begin_layout Section
4586 Paragraph Environments
4587 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4589 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4594 \begin_inset Index idx
4597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4598 Paragraph ! Environments
4604 \begin_inset Index idx
4607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4608 Paragraph environments|(
4616 \begin_layout Subsection
4620 \begin_layout Standard
4621 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4624 \begin_layout Standard
4633 } \SpecialChar ldots
4643 \begin_inset Newline newline
4646 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4648 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4649 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4650 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4659 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4662 \begin_layout Standard
4663 A paragraph environment is simply a
4664 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4668 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4671 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4672 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4673 scheme, labels, and so on.
4674 Additionally, you can
4675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4682 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4683 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4684 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4685 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4687 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4689 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4692 \begin_layout Standard
4693 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4694 \begin_inset Graphics
4695 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4701 at the left end of the toolbar.
4703 will change the environment of the
4707 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4708 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4709 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4713 \begin_layout Standard
4722 create a new paragraph using the
4726 paragraph environment.
4728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4732 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4735 because if you are in one of these environments:
4738 \begin_layout Itemize
4744 \begin_layout Itemize
4750 \begin_layout Itemize
4756 \begin_layout Itemize
4762 \begin_layout Itemize
4768 \begin_layout Itemize
4774 \begin_layout Itemize
4780 \begin_layout Standard
4782 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4786 , rather than resetting it to
4791 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4792 \begin_inset space ~
4796 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4798 reference "sec:Nesting"
4805 \begin_layout Subsection
4809 \begin_layout Standard
4810 The default paragraph environment is
4815 It creates a plain paragraph.
4817 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4818 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4819 this manual) are in the
4826 \begin_layout Standard
4827 You can nest a paragraph using the
4831 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4839 \begin_layout Subsection
4841 \begin_inset Index idx
4844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4853 \begin_layout Standard
4854 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4855 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4864 for thanks or contact information.
4865 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4866 places all of this on a separate page
4867 along with today's date.
4868 For other types of documents, the title
4869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4876 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4880 \begin_layout Standard
4882 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4896 Here's how you use them:
4899 \begin_layout Itemize
4900 Put the title of your document in the
4907 \begin_layout Itemize
4908 Put the author name in the
4915 \begin_layout Itemize
4916 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4917 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4923 Note that using this environment is optional.
4924 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4925 will automatically insert today's date.
4926 If you don't want a date, use the option
4928 Suppress default date on front page
4932 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4933 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4935 \begin_inset space ~
4943 \begin_layout Standard
4944 You can use footnotes to insert
4945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4949 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4952 or contact information.
4955 \begin_layout Subsection
4957 \begin_inset Index idx
4960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4967 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4969 name "subsec:Headings"
4976 \begin_layout Standard
4977 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4979 takes care of the numbering for you.
4982 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4984 \begin_inset Index idx
4987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4988 Section headings ! Numbered
4996 \begin_layout Standard
4997 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5001 \begin_layout Enumerate
5007 \begin_layout Enumerate
5013 \begin_layout Enumerate
5019 \begin_layout Enumerate
5025 \begin_layout Enumerate
5031 \begin_layout Enumerate
5037 \begin_layout Enumerate
5043 \begin_layout Standard
5045 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5046 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5047 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5050 \begin_layout Standard
5051 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5052 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5053 You group the book into chapters.
5055 does a similar grouping:
5058 \begin_layout Itemize
5063 is divided into either
5074 \begin_layout Itemize
5086 \begin_layout Itemize
5098 \begin_layout Itemize
5110 \begin_layout Itemize
5122 \begin_layout Itemize
5134 \begin_layout Standard
5135 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5143 Not all document types use the
5147 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5152 is the top-level heading.
5160 \begin_layout Standard
5165 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5166 labels it with its number,
5167 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5169 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5171 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5175 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5181 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5183 \begin_inset Index idx
5186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5187 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5195 \begin_layout Standard
5196 The unnumbered section headings have a
5197 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5201 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5204 at the end of their name.
5205 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5206 the table of contents, see section
5207 \begin_inset space ~
5211 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5220 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5221 Changing the Numbering
5222 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5224 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5231 \begin_layout Standard
5232 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5233 in the Table of Contents.
5234 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5236 Just as certain classes start with
5250 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5260 This is something you can change.
5263 \begin_layout Standard
5266 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5270 \begin_inset Index idx
5273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5282 \begin_inset space ~
5286 \begin_inset space ~
5291 you will see two counters.
5296 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5297 numbers a section heading.
5298 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5302 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5303 Short Titles of Headings
5304 \begin_inset Index idx
5307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5308 Section headings ! Short titles
5314 \begin_inset Argument 1
5317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5324 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5326 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5333 \begin_layout Standard
5334 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5335 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5336 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5337 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5340 \begin_layout Standard
5342 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5343 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5344 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5345 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5348 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5350 \begin_inset space ~
5356 This will insert a box labeled
5357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5361 \begin_inset space ~
5365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5368 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5369 This also works for captions inside floats.
5370 There can only be one short title per title.
5373 \begin_layout Standard
5374 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5377 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5381 \begin_layout Standard
5382 The following information applies to all section headings:
5385 \begin_layout Itemize
5386 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5389 \begin_layout Itemize
5390 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5393 \begin_layout Itemize
5394 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5397 \begin_layout Itemize
5398 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5401 \begin_layout Subsection
5405 \begin_layout Standard
5407 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5421 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5422 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5423 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5424 the text they contain.
5425 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5433 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5436 \begin_layout Standard
5437 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5446 when you start a new paragraph.
5447 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5451 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5452 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5453 have to change back to the
5457 environment yourself.
5460 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5462 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5469 \begin_inset Index idx
5472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5481 \begin_layout Standard
5482 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5483 time for the differences.
5492 are identical except for one difference:
5496 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5505 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5508 \begin_layout Standard
5509 Here's an example of the
5522 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5524 See – no indentation!
5528 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5529 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5530 the other paragraph.
5533 \begin_layout Standard
5534 Here's another example, this time in the
5541 \begin_layout Quotation
5547 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5548 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5549 the first line, then
5553 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5557 you were quoting other text.
5560 \begin_layout Quotation
5561 Here's a new paragraph.
5562 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5563 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5566 \begin_layout Standard
5567 As the examples show,
5571 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5572 They should put quotes in the
5577 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5581 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5584 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5586 \begin_inset Index idx
5589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5596 \begin_inset Index idx
5599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5606 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5615 \begin_layout Standard
5620 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5626 \begin_inset Newline newline
5629 Which I did not rehearse!
5633 It could be much worse.
5634 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5636 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5637 indented a bit more than the first.
5638 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5644 \begin_inset Newline newline
5647 And make things look fine
5648 \begin_inset Newline newline
5654 arg "newline-insert newline"
5660 \begin_layout Standard
5665 does not indent both margins.
5666 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5667 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5670 arg "newline-insert newline"
5676 \begin_layout Subsection
5678 \begin_inset Index idx
5681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5688 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5697 \begin_layout Standard
5699 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5709 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5710 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5719 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5720 lets you provide your own label.
5721 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5722 describing some general features of all four of them.
5725 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5729 \begin_layout Standard
5730 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5732 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5733 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5742 reset the environment to
5746 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5747 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5748 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5752 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5756 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5763 \begin_layout Standard
5764 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5765 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5766 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5768 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5769 you read all of section
5770 \begin_inset space ~
5774 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5776 reference "sec:Nesting"
5783 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5785 \begin_inset Index idx
5788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5795 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5804 \begin_layout Standard
5805 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5809 paragraph environment.
5810 It has the following properties:
5813 \begin_layout Itemize
5814 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5818 \begin_layout Itemize
5820 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5823 \begin_layout Itemize
5824 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5828 \begin_layout Itemize
5829 The items can have any length.
5831 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5832 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5839 \begin_layout Itemize
5844 environment inside another
5848 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5852 \begin_layout Itemize
5853 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5856 \begin_layout Itemize
5858 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5861 \begin_layout Itemize
5863 \begin_inset space ~
5867 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5869 reference "sec:Nesting"
5873 for a full explanation of nesting.
5877 \begin_layout Standard
5878 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5887 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5890 \begin_layout Standard
5891 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5892 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5895 \begin_layout Itemize
5896 The label for the first level
5900 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5904 \begin_layout Itemize
5905 The label for the second level is a dash.
5909 \begin_layout Itemize
5910 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5914 \begin_layout Itemize
5915 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5919 \begin_layout Itemize
5920 Back out to the third level.
5924 \begin_layout Itemize
5925 Back to the second level.
5929 \begin_layout Itemize
5930 Back to the outermost level.
5933 \begin_layout Standard
5934 These are the default labels for an
5939 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5941 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5944 dialog in the submenu
5949 \begin_inset Index idx
5952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5958 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5962 \begin_layout Standard
5963 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5964 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5966 \begin_inset space ~
5970 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5972 reference "sec:Nesting"
5979 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5981 \begin_inset Index idx
5984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5991 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5993 name "sec:Enumerate"
6000 \begin_layout Standard
6005 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6006 It has these properties:
6009 \begin_layout Enumerate
6010 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6014 \begin_layout Enumerate
6015 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6019 \begin_layout Enumerate
6021 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6024 \begin_layout Enumerate
6029 environment resets the counter to one.
6032 \begin_layout Enumerate
6045 \begin_layout Enumerate
6046 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6047 Items can have any length.
6050 \begin_layout Enumerate
6051 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6054 \begin_layout Enumerate
6055 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6058 \begin_layout Enumerate
6059 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6063 \begin_layout Standard
6072 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6074 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6075 labels the four different levels in an
6082 \begin_layout Enumerate
6083 The first level of an
6087 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6091 \begin_layout Enumerate
6092 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6096 \begin_layout Enumerate
6097 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6101 \begin_layout Enumerate
6102 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6105 \begin_layout Enumerate
6106 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6111 \begin_layout Enumerate
6112 Back to the third level
6116 \begin_layout Enumerate
6117 Back to the second level.
6121 \begin_layout Enumerate
6122 Back to the outermost level.
6125 \begin_layout Standard
6126 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6130 environment, see section
6131 \begin_inset space ~
6135 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6137 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6142 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6146 \begin_layout Standard
6147 There is more to nesting
6151 environments than we've stated here.
6152 You should read section
6153 \begin_inset space ~
6157 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6159 reference "sec:Nesting"
6163 to learn more about nesting.
6166 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6168 \begin_inset Index idx
6171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6180 \begin_layout Standard
6181 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6185 list has no fixed label.
6186 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6188 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6192 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6195 of the first line as the label.
6199 \begin_layout Description
6200 Example: This is an example of the
6207 \begin_layout Standard
6209 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6213 \begin_layout Standard
6215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6222 it is meant that the first usage of the
6226 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6228 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6236 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6241 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6242 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6244 \begin_inset space ~
6250 \begin_inset space ~
6254 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6256 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6260 for more information.) Here is an example:
6263 \begin_layout Description
6265 \begin_inset space ~
6268 Example: This one shows how to use a
6271 \begin_inset space ~
6283 \begin_layout Description
6284 Usage: You should use the
6288 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6289 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6291 It's not a good idea to use a
6295 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6296 You're better off using
6308 paragraphs into them.
6311 \begin_layout Description
6312 Nesting: You can nest
6316 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6320 \begin_layout Standard
6321 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6322 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6323 them from the first line.
6326 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6328 \begin_inset Index idx
6331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6340 \begin_layout Standard
6345 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6346 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6350 \begin_layout Standard
6359 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6361 Here are its properties:
6364 \begin_layout Labeling
6365 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6367 \begin_inset space ~
6370 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6372 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6376 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6379 of each line as the item label.
6384 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6385 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6386 space as described above.
6389 \begin_layout Labeling
6390 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6391 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6392 uses different margins for the item label and the
6393 body of the item text.
6394 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6395 label width plus a little extra space.
6399 \begin_layout Labeling
6400 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6402 \begin_inset space ~
6405 width \SpecialChar LyX
6406 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6407 If the label width is larger, the label
6408 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6412 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6415 into the first line.
6416 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6417 margin of the rest of the item text.
6420 \begin_layout Labeling
6421 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6423 \begin_inset space ~
6426 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6431 environment has the same left margin.
6432 \begin_inset Newline newline
6435 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6438 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6440 \begin_inset space ~
6445 dialog (toolbar button
6448 arg "layout-paragraph"
6455 \begin_inset space ~
6460 determines the default label width.
6461 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6463 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6467 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6470 multiple times instead.
6471 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6474 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6478 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6481 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6484 \begin_inset space ~
6489 every time you alter a label in a
6494 \begin_inset Newline newline
6497 The predefined default width is the length of
6498 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6502 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6506 \begin_inset space ~
6512 \begin_layout Standard
6517 list the same way as the
6521 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6527 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6531 \begin_layout Standard
6536 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6537 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6539 \begin_inset space ~
6543 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6545 reference "sec:Nesting"
6549 to learn about nesting.
6552 \begin_layout Standard
6553 There is yet another feature of the
6557 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6558 left-justifies the item labels by
6560 You can use additional
6564 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6565 justifies the item label.
6570 are documented in section
6571 \begin_inset space ~
6575 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6577 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6582 Here are some examples:
6585 \begin_layout Labeling
6586 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6587 Left The default for
6594 \begin_layout Labeling
6595 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6596 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6603 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6606 \begin_layout Labeling
6607 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6608 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6612 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6619 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6622 \begin_layout Subsection
6624 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6626 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6631 \begin_inset Index idx
6634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6643 \begin_layout Standard
6644 The features described in this section require that the module
6646 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6648 is loaded in the document settings.
6649 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6655 \begin_inset Index idx
6658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6660 -packages ! enumitem
6668 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6669 Custom Enumerate Lists
6670 \begin_inset Index idx
6673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6674 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6682 \begin_layout Standard
6684 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6687 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6690 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6691 There you add the command
6694 \begin_layout Standard
6702 \begin_layout Standard
6714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6715 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6716 Code, look at section
6717 \begin_inset space ~
6721 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6723 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6736 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6743 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6744 For capital Roman numerals replace
6756 in the command above.
6757 For Arabic numerals use
6765 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6772 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6787 \begin_layout Standard
6789 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6797 You can only number 26
6798 \begin_inset space ~
6801 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6809 \begin_layout Standard
6810 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6811 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6814 \begin_layout Standard
6815 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6818 \begin_layout Enumerate
6819 \begin_inset Argument 1
6822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6848 \begin_layout Enumerate
6849 \begin_inset Argument 1
6852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6875 \begin_layout Enumerate
6880 \begin_layout Enumerate
6881 \begin_inset Argument 1
6884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6908 \begin_layout Enumerate
6909 \begin_inset Argument 1
6912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6938 \begin_layout Standard
6939 For this list these commands were used:
6942 \begin_layout Standard
6953 \begin_inset Newline newline
6961 \begin_inset Newline newline
6969 \begin_inset Newline newline
6979 \begin_layout Standard
6986 makes the label emphasized and
6995 \begin_layout Standard
6996 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7004 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7005 lists until you change the definition.
7013 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7015 \begin_inset Index idx
7018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7019 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7027 \begin_layout Standard
7028 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7031 \begin_layout Enumerate
7032 \begin_inset Argument 1
7035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7054 \begin_inset Note Note
7057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7058 goes back to default numbering
7066 \begin_layout Enumerate
7070 \begin_layout Standard
7074 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7078 \begin_layout Standard
7079 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7084 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7085 to indicate that it is a resumed
7086 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7087 , but in the output.
7090 \begin_layout Standard
7091 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7099 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7108 \begin_layout Standard
7109 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7111 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7112 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7113 of a normal enumeration.
7114 There, insert the command
7117 \begin_layout Standard
7123 \begin_layout Standard
7128 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7132 \begin_layout Enumerate
7136 \begin_layout Enumerate
7140 \begin_layout Standard
7141 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7144 \begin_layout Enumerate
7145 \begin_inset Argument 1
7148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7164 This enumeration starts at 4
7167 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7169 \begin_inset Index idx
7172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7181 \begin_layout Standard
7182 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7184 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7187 \begin_layout Itemize
7191 \begin_layout Itemize
7192 with standard spacing
7195 \begin_layout Standard
7196 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7198 Add there the command
7202 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7205 \begin_layout Itemize
7206 \begin_inset Argument 1
7209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7228 \begin_layout Itemize
7232 \begin_layout Itemize
7236 \begin_layout Standard
7237 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7244 \begin_inset Index idx
7247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7249 -packages ! enumitem
7255 For more information see its documentation,
7256 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7265 \begin_layout Standard
7266 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7268 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7269 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7270 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7273 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7276 \begin_layout Enumerate
7277 \begin_inset Argument 1
7280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7288 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7301 \begin_layout Enumerate
7302 with negative indentation
7305 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7306 Further Customization
7307 \begin_inset Index idx
7310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7311 Lists ! Customization
7319 \begin_layout Standard
7320 You can also change the style of description lists.
7324 \begin_layout Standard
7330 \begin_layout Standard
7331 changes the description label font, the command
7334 \begin_layout Standard
7340 \begin_layout Standard
7341 sets the list style.
7344 \begin_layout Standard
7345 An example where the command
7348 \begin_layout Standard
7353 itshape, style=nextline
7356 \begin_layout Standard
7360 \begin_layout Description
7362 \begin_inset space ~
7366 \begin_inset Argument 1
7369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7375 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7377 itshape, style=nextline
7387 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7388 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7392 \begin_layout Description
7394 \begin_inset space ~
7397 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7398 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7399 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7402 \begin_layout Standard
7403 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7409 \begin_inset Index idx
7412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7414 -packages ! enumitem
7420 For more information see its documentation
7421 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7430 \begin_layout Subsection
7432 \begin_inset Index idx
7435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7444 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7446 \begin_inset space ~
7449 Address: An Overview
7452 \begin_layout Standard
7453 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7454 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7462 \begin_inset space ~
7468 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7469 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7470 gags on the document.
7471 In contrast, you can use the
7478 \begin_inset space ~
7483 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7484 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7488 \begin_layout Standard
7489 Of course, you're not limited to using
7496 \begin_inset space ~
7505 \begin_inset space ~
7510 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7511 some European academic papers.
7514 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7516 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7518 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7525 \begin_layout Standard
7530 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7531 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7535 \begin_inset space ~
7540 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7541 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7542 Here's an example of each:
7545 \begin_layout Right Address
7547 \begin_inset Newline newline
7551 \begin_inset Newline newline
7555 \begin_inset Newline newline
7558 When is it? What is today?
7561 \begin_layout Standard
7565 \begin_inset space ~
7571 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7573 the largest block of text on a single line.
7574 Here's an example of the
7581 \begin_layout Address
7583 \begin_inset Newline newline
7586 Where do I send this
7587 \begin_inset Newline newline
7590 Your post office and country
7593 \begin_layout Standard
7594 As you can see, both
7601 \begin_inset space ~
7606 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7611 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7612 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7618 This makes sense, since
7626 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7627 Thus, you have to use
7634 arg "newline-insert newline"
7639 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7640 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7642 \begin_inset space ~
7646 \begin_inset space ~
7651 ) to start a new line in an
7658 \begin_inset space ~
7666 \begin_layout Subsection
7670 \begin_layout Standard
7671 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7672 or list of references.
7674 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7677 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7679 \begin_inset Index idx
7682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7691 \begin_layout Standard
7696 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7697 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7698 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7699 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7713 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7714 The book document classes ignores the
7718 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7722 in a letter document class.
7725 \begin_layout Standard
7730 environment does several things for you.
7731 First, it puts the centered label
7732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7740 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7742 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7743 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7744 the subsequent text.
7745 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7747 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7751 \begin_layout Standard
7752 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7756 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7757 The new paragraph will still be in the
7762 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7763 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7766 \begin_layout Standard
7767 \begin_inset Float figure
7772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7774 \begin_inset Graphics
7775 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7783 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7786 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7788 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7809 \begin_layout Standard
7810 We would love to demonstrate the
7814 environment, but since this document is in the
7815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7822 class, we can't do this.
7823 We inserted it therefore as figure
7824 \begin_inset space ~
7828 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7830 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7835 If you have never heard of an
7836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7843 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7846 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7848 \begin_inset Index idx
7851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7858 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7860 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7867 \begin_layout Standard
7872 environment is used to list references.
7873 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7874 only use it at the end of the document.
7886 \begin_layout Standard
7887 When you first open a
7891 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7892 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7897 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7908 depending on the document class.
7909 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7910 Each paragraph of the
7914 environment is a bibliography entry.
7919 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7920 Each new paragraph is still in the
7927 \begin_layout Standard
7928 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7929 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7931 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7933 handling, have a look at section
7934 \begin_inset space ~
7938 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7940 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7947 \begin_layout Subsection
7948 Special Environments
7951 \begin_layout Standard
7953 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7954 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7957 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7962 \begin_inset Index idx
7965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7973 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7975 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
7982 \begin_layout Standard
7988 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7990 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7995 key as a fixed whitespace.
7999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8012 \begin_inset space ~
8017 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8035 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8038 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8041 arg "newline-insert newline"
8058 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8059 So, when you finish using the
8064 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8065 Also, you can nest the
8070 environment inside of others.
8073 \begin_layout Standard
8074 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8077 \begin_layout Itemize
8081 arg "newline-insert newline"
8084 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8085 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8089 \begin_inset space \space{}
8099 arg "newline-insert newline"
8105 \begin_layout Itemize
8109 arg "newline-insert newline"
8119 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8125 \begin_layout Itemize
8126 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8127 You must put at least one
8131 in any line you want blank.
8132 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8136 \begin_layout Itemize
8137 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8141 since that will insert
8146 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8149 arg "self-insert \""
8155 \begin_layout Standard
8159 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8163 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8167 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8171 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8175 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8176 printf("Hello World!
8181 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8185 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8189 \begin_layout Standard
8190 This is just the standard
8191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8202 \begin_layout Standard
8208 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8210 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8211 as if you used a typewriter.
8212 \begin_inset Index idx
8215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8216 Paragraph environments|)
8221 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8224 Program Code Listings
8229 \begin_inset space ~
8237 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8241 \begin_inset Index idx
8244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8253 \begin_layout Standard
8258 environment is similar to the
8263 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8264 computer console text.
8269 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8283 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8284 you can have empty lines.
8297 \begin_layout Itemize
8298 have a certain language and a text style
8301 \begin_layout Itemize
8302 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8303 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8304 and \SpecialChar TeX
8308 \begin_layout Standard
8309 Because of these properties
8313 works like a typewriter.
8317 \begin_layout Verbatim
8321 \begin_layout Verbatim
8324 The following 2 lines are empty:
8327 \begin_layout Verbatim
8331 \begin_layout Verbatim
8335 \begin_layout Verbatim
8336 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8341 \begin_layout Standard
8346 environment is identical to
8350 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8351 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8358 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8362 \begin_layout Section
8363 Nesting Environments
8364 \begin_inset Index idx
8367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8368 Nesting ! Environments
8374 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8383 \begin_layout Subsection
8387 \begin_layout Standard
8389 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8391 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8393 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8395 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8407 \begin_layout Enumerate
8411 \begin_layout Enumerate
8416 \begin_layout Enumerate
8420 \begin_layout Enumerate
8425 \begin_layout Enumerate
8429 \begin_layout Standard
8430 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8431 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8433 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8435 \begin_inset space ~
8439 \begin_inset space ~
8447 \begin_inset space ~
8451 \begin_inset space ~
8456 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8458 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8461 arg "depth-increment"
8467 arg "depth-decrement"
8481 arg "depth-increment"
8487 arg "depth-decrement"
8491 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8492 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8496 \begin_layout Standard
8497 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8498 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8499 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8500 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8501 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8504 \begin_layout Standard
8505 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8507 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8509 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8512 \begin_layout Subsection
8513 What You Can and Can't Nest
8516 \begin_layout Standard
8517 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8518 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8521 \begin_layout Standard
8522 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8523 than a simple yes or no.
8524 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8527 \begin_layout Itemize
8528 Completely unnestable
8531 \begin_layout Itemize
8532 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8536 \begin_layout Itemize
8537 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8541 \begin_layout Standard
8542 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8543 environments have them:
8546 \begin_layout Description
8547 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8548 Can't nest into them.
8552 \begin_layout Itemize
8558 \begin_layout Itemize
8564 \begin_layout Itemize
8570 \begin_layout Itemize
8576 \begin_layout Itemize
8583 \begin_layout Description
8585 \begin_inset space ~
8588 Nestable You can nest them.
8589 You can nest other things into them.
8593 \begin_layout Itemize
8599 \begin_layout Itemize
8605 \begin_layout Itemize
8611 \begin_layout Itemize
8617 \begin_layout Itemize
8623 \begin_layout Itemize
8629 \begin_layout Itemize
8635 \begin_layout Itemize
8642 \begin_layout Itemize
8648 \begin_layout Itemize
8655 \begin_layout Description
8656 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8657 You can't nest anything into them.
8661 \begin_layout Itemize
8667 \begin_layout Itemize
8673 \begin_layout Itemize
8679 \begin_layout Itemize
8685 \begin_layout Itemize
8691 \begin_layout Itemize
8697 \begin_layout Itemize
8703 \begin_layout Itemize
8709 \begin_layout Itemize
8715 \begin_layout Itemize
8721 \begin_layout Itemize
8727 \begin_layout Itemize
8733 \begin_layout Itemize
8739 \begin_layout Itemize
8743 \begin_inset space ~
8749 \begin_layout Itemize
8756 \begin_layout Standard
8757 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8765 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8775 \begin_inset space ~
8778 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8779 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8780 nested section headings violate this.
8788 \begin_layout Subsection
8789 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8790 \begin_inset Index idx
8793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8794 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8802 \begin_layout Standard
8803 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8804 affected by nesting anyhow.
8808 \begin_layout Itemize
8812 \begin_layout Itemize
8816 \begin_layout Itemize
8820 \begin_layout Standard
8822 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8830 Figures and tables in
8834 are not affected by this.
8839 Have a look at section
8840 \begin_inset space ~
8844 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8846 reference "sec:Floats"
8850 for more information about
8857 \begin_layout Standard
8859 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8860 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8864 \begin_layout Standard
8865 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8866 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8870 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8873 of its own, it behaves just like a
8874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8878 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8881 paragraph environment.
8882 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8886 \begin_layout Standard
8887 Here's an example with a table:
8890 \begin_layout Enumerate
8895 \begin_layout Enumerate
8896 This is (a) and it's nested.
8900 \begin_layout Standard
8901 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8907 \begin_layout Standard
8909 \begin_inset Tabular
8910 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8911 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8912 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8913 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8997 \begin_layout Standard
8998 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9005 \begin_layout Enumerate
9007 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9011 \begin_layout Enumerate
9015 \begin_layout Standard
9016 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9019 \begin_layout Enumerate
9024 \begin_layout Enumerate
9025 This is (a) and it's nested.
9029 \begin_layout Standard
9030 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9036 \begin_layout Standard
9038 \begin_inset Tabular
9039 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9040 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9041 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9042 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9126 \begin_layout Standard
9127 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9133 \begin_layout Enumerate
9140 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9143 \begin_layout Enumerate
9147 \begin_layout Standard
9148 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9152 \begin_layout Standard
9153 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9156 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9159 \begin_layout Enumerate
9164 \begin_layout Enumerate
9165 This is (a) and it's nested.
9168 \begin_layout Standard
9169 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9175 \begin_layout Standard
9177 \begin_inset Tabular
9178 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9179 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9180 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9181 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9266 \begin_layout Standard
9267 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9273 \begin_layout Enumerate
9275 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9282 \begin_layout Enumerate
9286 \begin_layout Standard
9287 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9293 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9294 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9298 \begin_layout Subsection
9299 Usage and General Features
9302 \begin_layout Standard
9303 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9304 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9306 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9313 is the innermost possible depth.
9314 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9317 \begin_layout Enumerate
9318 level #1 – outermost
9322 \begin_layout Enumerate
9327 \begin_layout Enumerate
9332 \begin_layout Enumerate
9337 \begin_layout Itemize
9342 \begin_layout Itemize
9351 \begin_layout Standard
9352 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9353 both of them in the example.
9354 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9364 For example, if we tried to nest another
9369 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9376 , we would get errors.
9379 \begin_layout Subsection
9381 \begin_inset Index idx
9384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9393 \begin_layout Standard
9394 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9395 We have several examples of nested environments.
9396 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9400 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9401 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9404 \begin_layout Labeling
9405 \labelwidthstring MMM
9406 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9415 \begin_layout Labeling
9416 \labelwidthstring MMM
9417 #2-a This is level #2.
9418 We created it by using
9421 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9427 arg "depth-increment"
9434 \begin_layout Labeling
9435 \labelwidthstring MMM
9436 #3-a This is level #3.
9437 This time, we just enter
9444 arg "depth-increment"
9448 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9452 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9458 arg "depth-increment"
9465 \begin_layout Standard
9470 environment, nested inside of
9471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9479 So, it's at level #4.
9480 We did this by entering
9483 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9489 arg "depth-increment"
9492 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9497 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9513 \begin_layout Standard
9518 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9521 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9527 \begin_layout Labeling
9528 \labelwidthstring MMM
9529 #4-a This is level #4.
9533 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9536 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9541 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9545 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9550 keep nesting things inside
9551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9555 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9562 \begin_layout Labeling
9563 \labelwidthstring MMM
9564 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9569 \begin_layout Labeling
9570 \labelwidthstring MMM
9571 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9572 and this is level #6.
9573 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9577 \begin_layout Labeling
9578 \labelwidthstring MMM
9579 #5-b Back to level #5.
9583 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9589 arg "depth-decrement"
9596 \begin_layout Labeling
9597 \labelwidthstring MMM
9601 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9607 arg "depth-decrement"
9610 , we're back at level #4.
9614 \begin_layout Labeling
9615 \labelwidthstring MMM
9616 #3-b Back to level #3.
9617 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9621 \begin_layout Labeling
9622 \labelwidthstring MMM
9623 #2-b Back to level #2.
9628 \begin_layout Labeling
9629 \labelwidthstring MMM
9630 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9631 After this sentence, we will enter
9635 and change the paragraph environment back to
9642 \begin_layout Standard
9643 We could have also used the
9659 environment in place of the
9664 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9667 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9668 Example 2: Inheritance
9671 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9672 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9675 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9684 arg "depth-increment"
9688 \begin_inset Newline newline
9691 which, we will change to the
9699 \begin_layout Enumerate
9704 environment, at level #2.
9707 \begin_layout Enumerate
9708 Notice how the nested
9712 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9716 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9720 \begin_layout Standard
9721 We ended this example by entering
9726 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9730 and reset the nesting depth by using
9733 arg "depth-decrement"
9739 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9740 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9749 \begin_inset Argument 1
9752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9753 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9761 \begin_layout Enumerate
9762 This is level #1, in an
9766 paragraph environment.
9767 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9771 \begin_layout Enumerate
9776 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9782 arg "depth-increment"
9786 Now, what happens if we nest an
9790 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9791 label be? An asterisk?
9795 \begin_layout Itemize
9805 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9806 So, its label is a bullet.
9807 (We got here by using
9810 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9816 arg "depth-increment"
9819 , then changing the environment to
9827 \begin_layout Itemize
9828 Here's level #4, produced using
9831 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9837 arg "depth-increment"
9841 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9846 \begin_layout Enumerate
9849 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9854 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9858 , because we are in the
9866 environment (that is, it is an
9881 \begin_layout Enumerate
9886 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9887 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9891 \begin_layout Enumerate
9892 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9895 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9898 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9901 \begin_layout Enumerate
9905 arg "depth-decrement"
9908 to decrease the depth after the next
9911 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9918 \begin_layout Enumerate
9920 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9925 \begin_layout Enumerate
9927 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9928 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9932 \begin_layout Enumerate
9933 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9942 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9947 reset the counter for the label.
9951 \begin_layout Enumerate
9955 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9961 arg "depth-decrement"
9964 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9965 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9966 into the twofold-nested
9974 \begin_layout Enumerate
9975 The same thing happens if we do another
9978 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9984 arg "depth-decrement"
9987 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9990 \begin_layout Standard
9991 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9996 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10007 The number of other
10011 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10018 The same rule applies for the
10022 environment, as well.
10025 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10026 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10029 \begin_layout Enumerate
10030 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10031 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10032 the same detail with how we did it.
10041 \begin_layout Standard
10049 arg "depth-increment"
10056 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10057 the example in parentheses someplace.
10058 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10059 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10060 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10064 \begin_layout Enumerate
10069 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10073 \begin_layout Verse
10074 Now we will add verse.
10075 \begin_inset Newline newline
10078 It will get much worse.
10079 \begin_inset Newline newline
10089 arg "depth-increment"
10099 \begin_layout Verse
10100 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10101 \begin_inset Newline newline
10104 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10105 \begin_inset Newline newline
10111 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10119 \begin_layout Verse
10120 Here comes a table:
10124 \begin_layout Standard
10125 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10131 \begin_layout Standard
10133 \begin_inset Tabular
10134 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10135 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10136 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10137 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10222 \begin_layout Verse
10226 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10236 arg "depth-increment"
10242 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10248 \begin_inset Newline newline
10256 arg "depth-decrement"
10263 \begin_layout Enumerate
10268 : level #1) This is another item.
10269 Note that selecting a
10273 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10274 3 times to put the table inside the
10282 \begin_layout Quotation
10283 We're now ending the
10287 list and changing to
10292 We're still at level #1.
10293 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10294 The next set of paragraphs is a
10295 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10299 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10302 We will nest both the
10309 \begin_inset space ~
10314 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10318 for the letter body.
10322 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10325 to preserve the depth.
10326 Remember that you need to use
10329 arg "newline-insert newline"
10332 to create multiple lines inside the
10339 \begin_inset space ~
10349 \begin_layout Right Address
10351 \begin_inset Newline newline
10354 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10355 \begin_inset Newline newline
10361 \begin_layout Address
10363 \begin_inset space ~
10369 \begin_layout Quotation
10370 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10371 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10374 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10375 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10376 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10377 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10378 as soon as possible.
10379 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10382 \begin_layout Quotation
10383 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10384 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10385 with your order, along with payment.
10388 \begin_layout Quotation
10389 We thank you again for your patience.
10392 \begin_layout Address
10394 \begin_inset Newline newline
10401 \begin_layout Quotation
10402 That ends that example!
10405 \begin_layout Standard
10406 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10407 gives you a lot of power with just
10409 We could have easily nested an
10430 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10433 \begin_layout Subsection
10435 \begin_inset Index idx
10438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10439 Nesting ! Separation
10445 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10447 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10454 \begin_layout Standard
10455 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10457 For example you need two different enumerations:
10460 \begin_layout Enumerate
10465 \begin_layout Enumerate
10470 \begin_layout Enumerate
10474 \begin_layout Standard
10475 \begin_inset Separator plain
10481 \begin_layout Itemize
10487 \begin_layout Standard
10488 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10494 \begin_layout Enumerate
10498 \begin_layout Enumerate
10502 \begin_layout Enumerate
10506 \begin_layout Standard
10507 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10508 list item and use the menu
10510 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10511 Start New Environment
10514 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10515 ) and behind it the new list.
10518 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10519 Start New Parent Environment
10521 only appears if the item is nested.
10522 It does not only separate the list but also creates a new one outside the
10526 \begin_layout Standard
10527 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10528 (red arrow in LyX).
10529 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10530 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10533 \begin_layout Standard
10534 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10537 arg "paragraph-break"
10544 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10547 \begin_layout Section
10548 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10549 \begin_inset Index idx
10552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10561 \begin_layout Standard
10562 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10563 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10565 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10566 be broken at the end of a line.
10567 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10571 \begin_layout Subsection
10573 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10575 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10580 \begin_inset Index idx
10583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10592 \begin_layout Standard
10593 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10594 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10595 ) not to break the line at
10597 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10600 \begin_layout Quote
10601 Further documentation is given in section
10602 \begin_inset Newline newline
10606 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10608 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10616 \begin_layout Standard
10617 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10622 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10630 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10632 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10641 A protected space is set with
10643 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10644 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10646 \begin_inset space ~
10654 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10660 \begin_layout Subsection
10662 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10664 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10669 \begin_inset Index idx
10672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10673 Spacing ! Horizontal
10681 \begin_layout Standard
10682 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10684 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10685 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10689 The length units are listed in Appendix
10690 \begin_inset space ~
10694 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10696 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10703 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10705 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10707 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10712 \begin_inset Index idx
10715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10716 Spaces ! Inter-word
10724 \begin_layout Standard
10725 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10726 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10727 at the ends of sentences.
10728 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10729 automatically takes care about this.
10730 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10731 followed by a period; see section
10732 \begin_inset space ~
10736 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10738 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10743 To insert a normal space, select
10745 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10746 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10748 \begin_inset space ~
10756 arg "space-insert normal"
10762 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10764 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10766 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10771 \begin_inset Index idx
10774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10783 \begin_layout Standard
10785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10792 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10793 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10797 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10801 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10802 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10803 inside abbreviations:
10806 \begin_layout Quote
10808 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10812 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10815 \begin_layout Standard
10816 or between values and units.
10817 Compare for example this:
10818 \begin_inset Newline newline
10822 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10826 \begin_inset Newline newline
10829 10 kg (normal space
10832 \begin_layout Standard
10833 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10835 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10836 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10838 \begin_inset space ~
10846 arg "space-insert thin"
10852 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10856 \begin_layout Standard
10857 You can also insert the following space types:
10860 \begin_layout Description
10862 \begin_inset space ~
10866 \begin_inset space ~
10869 space A line with a
10870 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10874 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10878 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10881 negative thin space between the arrows.
10884 \begin_layout Description
10886 \begin_inset space ~
10890 \begin_inset space ~
10893 space A line with a
10894 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10898 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10902 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10905 negative medium space between the arrows.
10908 \begin_layout Description
10910 \begin_inset space ~
10914 \begin_inset space ~
10917 space A line with a
10918 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10922 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10926 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10929 negative thick space between the arrows.
10932 \begin_layout Description
10934 \begin_inset space ~
10938 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10942 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10946 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10950 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10954 \begin_inset space ~
10958 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10961 em) space between the arrows.
10964 \begin_layout Description
10966 \begin_inset space ~
10970 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10974 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10978 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10982 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10986 \begin_inset space ~
10990 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10993 em) space between the arrows.
10996 \begin_layout Description
10998 \begin_inset space ~
11002 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11006 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11010 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11014 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11018 \begin_inset space ~
11022 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11025 em) space between the arrows.
11028 \begin_layout Description
11030 \begin_inset space ~
11034 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11038 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11043 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11047 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11050 cm space between the arrows.
11053 \begin_layout Standard
11055 \begin_inset space ~
11059 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11061 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11065 lists the different space sizes.
11068 \begin_layout Standard
11069 \begin_inset Float table
11074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11075 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11078 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11080 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11084 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11094 \begin_inset Tabular
11095 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11096 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11097 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11098 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11138 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11162 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11186 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11210 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11214 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11218 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11242 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11266 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11281 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11294 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11309 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11322 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11337 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11350 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11371 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11373 \begin_inset Index idx
11376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11385 \begin_layout Standard
11386 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11387 feature for adding extra space
11388 in a uniform fashion.
11389 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11390 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11391 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11392 equally between themselves.
11395 \begin_layout Standard
11396 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11399 \begin_layout Quote
11401 This is on the left side
11402 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11405 This is on the right
11408 \begin_layout Quote
11411 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11415 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11421 \begin_layout Quote
11424 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11428 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11432 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11438 \begin_layout Standard
11439 That was an example in the
11445 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11449 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11453 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11456 is one in a standard paragraph.
11457 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11461 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11464 \begin_layout Standard
11465 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11468 \begin_inset space ~
11473 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11476 \begin_layout Standard
11478 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11482 \begin_inset space ~
11488 \begin_layout Standard
11490 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11494 \begin_inset space ~
11500 \begin_layout Standard
11502 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11506 \begin_inset space ~
11512 \begin_layout Standard
11514 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11518 \begin_inset space ~
11524 \begin_layout Standard
11526 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11530 \begin_inset space ~
11536 \begin_layout Standard
11538 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11542 \begin_inset space ~
11548 \begin_layout Standard
11549 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11557 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11561 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11563 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11564 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11568 option in the space dialog.
11576 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11578 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11580 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11585 \begin_inset Index idx
11588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11597 \begin_layout Standard
11598 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11599 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11602 \begin_layout Standard
11603 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11606 What is correct English?:
11607 \begin_inset Newline newline
11611 \begin_inset Newline newline
11615 \begin_inset space ~
11618 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11619 \begin_inset Newline newline
11623 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11634 \begin_inset Newline newline
11638 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11649 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11655 \begin_layout Standard
11657 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11662 \begin_inset space ~
11666 \begin_inset space ~
11670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11674 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11676 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11677 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11681 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11687 \begin_inset space ~
11691 \begin_inset space ~
11695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11698 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11699 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11703 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11707 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11708 That is why it is named
11709 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11713 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11717 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11718 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11722 \begin_layout Subsection
11724 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11726 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11731 \begin_inset Index idx
11734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11743 \begin_layout Standard
11744 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11746 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11747 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11749 \begin_inset space ~
11755 There you find the following sizes:
11758 \begin_layout Standard
11771 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11772 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11777 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11779 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11780 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11782 \begin_inset space ~
11788 \begin_inset Index idx
11791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11792 Document ! Settings
11797 for the paragraph separation.
11798 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11809 \begin_layout Standard
11815 \begin_inset Index idx
11818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11824 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11825 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11830 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11831 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11840 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11849 s are described in section
11850 \begin_inset space ~
11854 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11856 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11865 If there are several
11869 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11870 You can therefore use
11874 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11877 \begin_layout Standard
11882 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11883 \begin_inset space ~
11887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11889 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11896 \begin_layout Standard
11897 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11907 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11908 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11920 \begin_layout Subsection
11921 Paragraph Alignment
11922 \begin_inset Index idx
11925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11926 Paragraph ! Alignment
11934 \begin_layout Standard
11935 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11937 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11940 dialog (toolbar button
11943 arg "layout-paragraph"
11947 There are five possibilities:
11950 \begin_layout Itemize
11958 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11964 \begin_layout Itemize
11972 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11978 \begin_layout Itemize
11986 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11992 \begin_layout Itemize
12000 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12006 \begin_layout Itemize
12014 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12020 \begin_layout Standard
12021 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12022 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12023 the left and right margins.
12024 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12027 \begin_layout Standard
12029 This paragraph is right aligned,
12032 \begin_layout Standard
12034 this one is centered,
12037 \begin_layout Standard
12039 this one is left aligned.
12042 \begin_layout Subsection
12044 \begin_inset Index idx
12047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12048 Page breaks ! Forced
12054 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12056 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12063 \begin_layout Standard
12064 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12065 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12066 force a page break where you want one.
12067 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12068 is good at page breaking.
12069 Only if you use a lot of
12073 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12074 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12077 \begin_layout Standard
12078 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12079 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12083 have to change the page breaking.
12086 \begin_layout Standard
12087 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12089 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12091 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12092 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12094 \begin_inset space ~
12100 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12102 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12103 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12105 \begin_inset space ~
12110 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12112 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12113 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12116 \begin_layout Standard
12117 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12118 at the top of a page.
12119 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12121 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12122 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12123 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12125 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12127 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12131 to learn more about
12138 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12140 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12142 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12147 \begin_inset Index idx
12150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12151 Page breaks ! Clear
12159 \begin_layout Standard
12160 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12161 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12162 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12163 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12164 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12167 \begin_layout Standard
12168 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12170 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12171 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12173 \begin_inset space ~
12179 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12181 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12182 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12184 \begin_inset space ~
12188 \begin_inset space ~
12193 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12194 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12197 \begin_layout Subsection
12199 \begin_inset Index idx
12202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12209 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12211 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12218 \begin_layout Standard
12219 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12221 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12223 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12224 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12226 \begin_inset space ~
12230 \begin_inset space ~
12238 arg "newline-insert newline"
12242 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12244 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12245 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12247 \begin_inset space ~
12251 \begin_inset space ~
12259 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12262 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12264 This is useful to avoid
12265 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12269 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12272 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12275 \begin_layout Standard
12276 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12277 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12279 very good at line breaking.
12280 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12281 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12282 \begin_inset space ~
12286 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12288 reference "sec:Quote"
12293 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12295 reference "sec:Verse"
12300 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12302 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12309 \begin_layout Subsection
12311 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12313 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12318 \begin_inset Index idx
12321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12330 \begin_layout Standard
12332 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12343 \begin_layout Standard
12347 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12348 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12350 \begin_inset space ~
12355 you can insert horizontal lines.
12356 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12357 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12358 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12361 \begin_layout Standard
12363 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12374 \begin_layout Section
12375 Characters and Symbols
12378 \begin_layout Standard
12379 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12380 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12381 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12383 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12387 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12389 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12393 for information on how this is done.
12396 \begin_layout Standard
12397 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12402 dialog via the menu
12404 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12405 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12411 \begin_layout Standard
12412 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12420 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12421 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12423 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12431 \begin_layout Section
12432 Fonts and Text Styles
12433 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12435 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12442 \begin_layout Subsection
12444 \begin_inset Index idx
12447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12456 \begin_layout Standard
12457 There are two types of fonts:
12460 \begin_layout Description
12462 \begin_inset space ~
12466 \begin_inset Index idx
12469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12475 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12476 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12480 characters) in the font.
12481 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12482 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12483 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12484 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12485 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12486 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12487 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12488 \begin_inset Newline newline
12491 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12492 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12493 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12494 sizes than at small ones.
12495 \begin_inset Newline newline
12509 \begin_inset space ~
12517 \begin_layout Description
12519 \begin_inset space ~
12523 \begin_inset Index idx
12526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12532 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12533 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12534 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12535 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12536 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12537 image manipulation program.
12538 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12539 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12540 \begin_inset space ~
12543 pixels high up to 34
12544 \begin_inset space ~
12547 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12548 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12549 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12551 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12552 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12553 \begin_inset Newline newline
12556 Bitmap fonts are named
12559 \begin_inset space ~
12564 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12567 \begin_layout Standard
12568 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12569 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12570 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12571 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12572 use scalable fonts.
12575 \begin_layout Standard
12576 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12579 \begin_layout Standard
12580 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12581 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12582 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12583 font to emphasize text, you use an
12584 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12588 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12592 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12594 In \SpecialChar LyX
12595 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12599 \begin_layout Subsection
12602 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12604 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12611 \begin_layout Standard
12612 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12613 used its own fonts.
12614 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12615 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12618 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12619 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12620 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12621 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12622 to a word processor.
12623 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12624 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12625 files are very portable across
12626 different machines.
12627 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12628 has increased a lot
12629 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12632 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12634 \begin_inset space ~
12638 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12640 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12645 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12646 code in the document
12647 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12650 \begin_layout Standard
12651 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12652 engines that are also able directly
12653 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12655 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12657 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12659 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12660 that is installed on your system.
12661 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12664 \begin_layout Standard
12665 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12673 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12674 es; so you might have to experiment.
12682 \begin_layout Subsection
12683 Document Font and Font size
12684 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12686 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12691 \begin_inset Index idx
12694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12701 \begin_inset Index idx
12704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12713 \begin_layout Standard
12714 You can set the document fonts in the
12716 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12720 \begin_inset Index idx
12723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12724 Document ! Settings
12734 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12735 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12738 \begin_inset space ~
12747 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12749 \begin_inset space ~
12752 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12755 \begin_layout Standard
12760 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12761 This requires that you use
12773 as the output format, i.
12774 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12778 \begin_inset space \space{}
12781 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12782 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12783 installed (see section
12784 \begin_inset space ~
12788 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12790 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12795 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12797 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12798 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12800 \begin_inset space ~
12803 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12804 cannot determine the family.
12805 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12806 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12809 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12812 \begin_layout Standard
12813 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12814 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12819 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12825 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12826 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12834 \begin_inset space ~
12840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12848 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12853 European Computer Modern
12856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12863 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12866 \begin_layout Standard
12875 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12876 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12881 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12884 \begin_inset space ~
12889 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12895 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12896 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12899 \begin_layout Itemize
12903 \begin_inset space ~
12908 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12921 \begin_inset space ~
12926 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12927 community in order to replace
12931 as the default font.
12932 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12933 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12936 \begin_inset space ~
12949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12950 One difference is improved kerning.
12958 \begin_layout Itemize
12962 \begin_inset space ~
12966 \begin_inset space ~
12971 fonts in (the rare) case that
12974 \begin_inset space ~
12979 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12994 Virtual means that it
12995 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13006 -glyphs from other fonts.
13007 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
13009 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13029 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13035 \begin_inset Index idx
13038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13040 -packages ! aeguill
13045 with the document preamble line
13046 \begin_inset Newline newline
13053 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
13054 \begin_inset Newline newline
13059 will fix the guillemet problem.
13064 and that accented characters are not
13068 glyph, but built of
13072 characters, the accent and the letter.
13073 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
13079 If you search for example for the French word
13080 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13084 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13087 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
13089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13096 and not for the glyph
13097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13101 \begin_inset space ~
13105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13111 \begin_layout Itemize
13112 If you do not like the look of
13120 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13121 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13125 \begin_inset space ~
13131 \begin_inset space ~
13141 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13142 \begin_inset space ~
13145 serif and typewriter fonts,
13149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13150 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13151 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13157 \begin_inset space ~
13166 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13167 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13171 \begin_inset space \space{}
13179 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13183 \begin_inset space \space{}
13189 \begin_inset space ~
13197 \begin_inset space ~
13207 but you can also select your own.
13208 \begin_inset Newline newline
13211 The differences between roman,
13214 \begin_inset space ~
13223 fonts are explained in section
13224 \begin_inset space ~
13228 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13230 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13235 \begin_inset Newline newline
13241 \begin_inset space ~
13246 was originally designed for newspapers.
13247 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13248 into the small newspaper columns.
13252 \begin_inset space ~
13257 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13260 \begin_layout Standard
13261 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13274 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13279 depends on the class you are using.
13280 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13283 \begin_layout Standard
13284 Note that the font size is the
13289 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13290 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13291 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13292 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13295 \begin_inset space ~
13301 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13302 \begin_inset space ~
13306 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13308 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13315 \begin_layout Standard
13319 \begin_inset space ~
13324 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13326 \begin_inset space ~
13329 serif or typewriter.
13334 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13344 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13347 \begin_layout Standard
13352 LaTeX font encoding
13354 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13355 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13361 \begin_inset Index idx
13364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13366 -packages ! fontenc
13372 \begin_inset space ~
13376 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13378 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13383 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13384 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13391 \begin_layout Standard
13392 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13394 Use Old Style Figures
13398 Use True Small Caps
13401 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13404 Use Old Style Figures
13406 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13408 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13409 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13413 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13416 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13420 Use True Small Caps
13422 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13423 of scaled capitals.
13424 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13425 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13428 \begin_layout Standard
13433 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13434 a font to display the script characters.
13438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13439 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13445 \begin_inset Index idx
13448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13455 So this has no effect for the document language
13469 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13473 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13481 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13486 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13487 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13489 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13491 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13494 dialog, see section
13495 \begin_inset space ~
13499 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13501 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13513 \begin_layout Subsection
13517 \begin_layout Standard
13518 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13519 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13521 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13522 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13523 choose a math font in the dialog
13525 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13529 \begin_inset Index idx
13532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13533 Document ! Settings
13539 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13540 automatically selects a math font.
13541 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13542 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13545 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13551 \begin_inset space ~
13557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13562 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13563 document font is available.
13566 \begin_layout Standard
13567 Note that the math font will not be used for
13571 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13577 or by the insertion of the command
13584 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13585 \begin_inset space ~
13589 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13590 while the math characters do not.
13592 \begin_inset space ~
13595 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13598 \begin_inset space ~
13606 \begin_inset space ~
13611 in the document font settings.
13614 \begin_layout Standard
13615 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13616 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13617 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13618 font (in most cases
13619 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13625 \begin_inset space ~
13631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13634 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13635 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13637 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13643 \begin_inset space ~
13649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13655 \begin_layout Subsection
13656 Using Different Character Styles
13657 \begin_inset Index idx
13660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13667 \begin_inset Index idx
13670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13679 \begin_layout Standard
13680 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13681 automatically changes the character style for certain
13682 paragraph environments.
13684 supports two character styles,
13693 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13697 \begin_layout Standard
13702 style, do one of the following:
13705 \begin_layout Itemize
13706 click on the toolbar button
13715 \begin_layout Itemize
13716 use the key binding
13725 \begin_layout Standard
13726 These commands are all toggles.
13731 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13734 \begin_layout Standard
13735 One typically uses the
13739 style for proper names.
13741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13748 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13756 \begin_layout Standard
13757 A more widely used character style is the
13762 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13769 \begin_layout Itemize
13770 clicking on the toolbar button
13779 \begin_layout Itemize
13780 using the keybindings
13789 \begin_layout Standard
13794 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13796 use a different font.
13799 \begin_layout Standard
13800 We've been using the
13804 style all over the place in this document.
13805 Here's one more example:
13808 \begin_layout Quotation
13811 Do not overuse character styles!
13814 \begin_layout Standard
13815 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13816 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13817 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13818 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13822 \begin_layout Standard
13823 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13831 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13833 \begin_inset space ~
13836 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13842 arg "dialog-show character"
13848 \begin_layout Subsection
13849 Fine-Tuning with the
13854 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13856 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13861 \begin_inset Index idx
13864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13873 \begin_layout Standard
13874 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13876 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13877 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13878 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13879 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13880 from ordinary dialog.
13883 \begin_layout Standard
13884 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13885 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13886 \begin_inset Newline newline
13889 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13890 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13893 \begin_layout Standard
13894 To use custom character styles, open the
13896 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13898 \begin_inset space ~
13901 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13904 dialog or press the toolbar button
13907 arg "dialog-show character"
13911 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13912 font property that you can choose.
13913 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13916 \begin_inset space ~
13921 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13926 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13927 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13928 environments all at once.
13931 \begin_layout Standard
13932 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13935 \begin_inset space ~
13947 \begin_layout Labeling
13948 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13954 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13958 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13962 The possible options are:
13966 \begin_layout Labeling
13967 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13972 This is the Roman font family.
13973 Normally a serif font.
13974 It's also the default family.
13984 \begin_layout Labeling
13985 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13989 \begin_inset space ~
13996 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14008 \begin_layout Labeling
14009 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14016 This is the Typewriter font family.
14022 arg "font-typewriter"
14031 \begin_layout Labeling
14032 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14037 This corresponds to the print weight.
14042 \begin_layout Labeling
14043 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14048 This is the Medium font series.
14049 It's also the default series.
14052 \begin_layout Labeling
14053 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14060 This is the Bold font series.
14073 \begin_layout Labeling
14074 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14079 As the name implies.
14084 \begin_layout Labeling
14085 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14090 This is the Upright font shape.
14091 It's also the default shape.
14094 \begin_layout Labeling
14095 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14109 s the Italic font shape
14115 \begin_layout Labeling
14116 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14123 This is the Slanted font shape
14125 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14126 , this is different from italic).
14129 \begin_layout Labeling
14130 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14134 \begin_inset space ~
14141 This is the Small caps font shape
14148 \begin_layout Labeling
14149 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14154 Alters the text color.
14155 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14159 \begin_inset space ~
14164 , which means that the document default color set in
14166 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14167 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14173 \begin_inset space ~
14178 is used, you can choose between
14255 \begin_inset Index idx
14258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14267 \begin_layout Labeling
14268 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14273 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14274 the language of the document.
14275 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14276 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14278 \begin_inset Newline newline
14281 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14283 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14284 When using the spell checking (see section
14285 \begin_inset space ~
14289 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14291 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14295 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14298 \begin_layout Labeling
14299 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14304 Alters the size of the font.
14305 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14306 proportional to the document font size.
14307 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14308 the details, but a general description of what
14314 \begin_layout Labeling
14315 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14336 arg "font-size tiny"
14342 \begin_layout Labeling
14343 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14355 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14364 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14370 \begin_layout Labeling
14371 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14379 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14392 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14398 \begin_layout Labeling
14399 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14420 arg "font-size small"
14426 \begin_layout Labeling
14427 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14433 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14437 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14441 It's also the default size.
14445 arg "font-size normal"
14451 \begin_layout Labeling
14452 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14473 arg "font-size large"
14479 \begin_layout Labeling
14480 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14501 arg "font-size larger"
14507 \begin_layout Labeling
14508 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14529 arg "font-size largest"
14535 \begin_layout Labeling
14536 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14544 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14548 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14557 arg "font-size huge"
14563 \begin_layout Labeling
14564 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14576 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14585 arg "font-size giant"
14591 \begin_layout Labeling
14592 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14597 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14606 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14610 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14617 arg "font-size increase"
14623 \begin_layout Labeling
14624 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14629 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14630 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14638 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14642 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14649 arg "font-size decrease"
14656 \begin_layout Standard
14661 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14662 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14664 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14665 — use those instead.
14666 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14669 \begin_layout Labeling
14670 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14675 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14680 \begin_layout Labeling
14681 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14688 This is text with emphasize on
14691 This might seem like the same as
14695 , but it is actually a bit different.
14701 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14703 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14706 \begin_layout Labeling
14707 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14714 This is text with Underbar on.
14720 arg "font-underline"
14726 \begin_inset Newline newline
14731 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14732 when you could not change fonts.
14733 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14734 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14735 because some people
14739 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14742 \begin_layout Labeling
14743 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14747 \begin_inset space ~
14754 This is text with Double underbar on.
14760 arg "font-underunderline"
14764 \begin_inset Newline newline
14767 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14768 about double underbar.
14771 \begin_layout Labeling
14772 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14776 \begin_inset space ~
14783 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14789 arg "font-underwave"
14793 \begin_inset Newline newline
14796 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14797 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14800 \begin_layout Labeling
14801 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14808 This is text with Strikeout on.
14814 arg "font-strikeout"
14818 \begin_inset Newline newline
14821 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14822 changed in the meantime.
14825 \begin_layout Labeling
14826 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14833 This is text with Noun on.
14840 , this is a logical attribute.
14841 Normally it's equivalent to
14844 \begin_inset space ~
14853 \begin_layout Standard
14854 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14855 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14857 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14859 \begin_inset space ~
14862 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14868 arg "dialog-show character"
14871 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14872 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14875 arg "textstyle-apply"
14879 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14883 \begin_layout Standard
14884 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14891 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14892 (suppose you just set the shape to
14893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14897 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14911 \begin_inset space ~
14923 \begin_layout Standard
14924 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14932 \begin_inset space ~
14944 \begin_layout Itemize
14950 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14957 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14975 \begin_inset Newline newline
14979 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14993 \begin_inset Note Note
14996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14997 For more on phantoms see section
14998 \begin_inset space ~
15002 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15004 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15014 \begin_inset Newline newline
15020 \begin_layout Itemize
15025 fonts use characters with serifs.
15026 These are the small
15027 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15034 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15035 The following example shows the difference:
15036 \begin_inset Newline newline
15040 \begin_inset Newline newline
15045 text without serifs
15048 \begin_inset Newline newline
15051 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15052 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15059 \begin_layout Itemize
15064 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15065 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15066 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15069 \begin_layout Standard
15070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15077 refers to applying or removing font properties.
15078 When a property is marked for toggling in the
15081 \begin_inset space ~
15086 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
15087 the property to be removed.
15088 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
15089 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
15090 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
15093 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15097 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15101 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15108 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
15109 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
15110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15117 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15121 \begin_inset space ~
15126 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15129 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15133 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15137 If you, for example, set
15138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15142 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15150 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15156 \begin_inset space ~
15161 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15163 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15167 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15170 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15173 \begin_layout Standard
15174 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15175 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15178 \begin_layout Section
15179 Printing and Previewing
15182 \begin_layout Subsection
15186 \begin_layout Standard
15187 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15188 using \SpecialChar LyX
15189 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15190 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15191 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15192 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15194 Additional Features
15199 \begin_layout Standard
15201 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15204 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15205 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15206 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15209 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15210 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15211 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15212 to turn your writing into printable output.
15213 This happens in two stages:
15216 \begin_layout Enumerate
15217 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15218 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15220 a file with the extension,
15221 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15229 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15235 \begin_layout Enumerate
15236 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15237 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15238 to use the commands in the
15242 file to produce printable output.
15245 \begin_layout Subsection
15246 Output file formats
15247 \begin_inset Index idx
15250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15257 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15259 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15266 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15267 Simple text (ASCII)
15268 \begin_inset Index idx
15271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15272 File formats ! ASCII
15280 \begin_layout Standard
15281 This file type has the extension
15282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15290 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15294 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15295 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15298 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15299 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15305 \begin_layout Standard
15306 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15308 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15309 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15311 \begin_inset space ~
15317 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15318 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15319 bibliography (section
15320 \begin_inset space ~
15324 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15326 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15331 If your document includes such material, use
15333 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15334 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15336 \begin_inset space ~
15340 \begin_inset space ~
15344 \begin_inset space ~
15352 \begin_inset space ~
15356 \begin_inset space ~
15362 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15363 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15366 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15369 \begin_inset Index idx
15372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15373 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15382 \begin_layout Standard
15383 This file type has the extension
15384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15395 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15398 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15399 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15400 -Errors or to process it manually
15401 with console commands.
15402 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15403 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15404 's temporary directory whenever you
15405 view or export your document.
15408 \begin_layout Standard
15409 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15410 -file using the menu
15412 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15413 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15417 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15418 export variants are explained in section
15419 \begin_inset space ~
15423 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15425 reference "subsec:Export"
15432 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15434 \begin_inset Index idx
15437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15446 \begin_layout Standard
15447 This file type has the extension
15448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15456 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15468 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15469 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15470 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15474 \begin_layout Standard
15475 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15476 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15477 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15478 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15479 when you view the DVI.
15480 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15483 \begin_layout Standard
15484 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15486 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15487 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15492 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15493 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15495 \begin_inset space ~
15501 The latter option uses the program
15503 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15509 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15512 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15513 font access (see section
15514 \begin_inset space ~
15518 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15520 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15525 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15526 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15531 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15533 \begin_inset Index idx
15536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15537 File formats ! PostScript
15545 \begin_layout Standard
15546 This file type has the extension
15547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15555 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15559 PostScript was developed by the company
15563 as a printer language.
15564 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15566 PostScript can be seen as a
15567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15570 programming language
15571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15574 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15579 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15586 \begin_inset Index idx
15589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15591 -packages ! pstricks
15601 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15604 \begin_layout Standard
15605 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15606 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15609 Encapsulated PostScript
15610 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15613 (EPS, file extension
15614 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15622 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15626 As \SpecialChar LyX
15627 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15628 convert them in the background to EPS.
15629 If, for example, you have 50
15630 \begin_inset space ~
15633 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15635 \begin_inset space ~
15638 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15639 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15641 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15642 EPS to avoid this problem.
15645 \begin_layout Standard
15646 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15648 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15649 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15655 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15657 \begin_inset Index idx
15660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15667 \begin_inset Index idx
15670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15679 \begin_layout Standard
15680 This file type has the extension
15681 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15697 Portable Document Format
15698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15705 was derived from PostScript.
15706 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15712 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15715 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15716 looks exactly the same.
15719 \begin_layout Standard
15720 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15724 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15728 (JPG, file extension
15729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15756 Portable Network Graphics
15757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15760 (PNG, file extension
15761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15773 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15774 converts them in the
15775 background to one of these formats.
15776 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15777 will slow down your workflow.
15778 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15781 \begin_layout Standard
15782 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15784 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15790 \begin_layout Description
15792 \begin_inset space ~
15795 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15799 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15802 \begin_layout Description
15804 \begin_inset space ~
15811 ) This uses the program
15813 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15816 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15819 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15822 is a new engine, derived from
15826 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15827 access (see section
15828 \begin_inset space ~
15832 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15834 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15839 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15840 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15845 \begin_layout Description
15847 \begin_inset space ~
15854 ) This uses the program
15859 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15865 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15866 font access (see section
15867 \begin_inset space ~
15871 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15873 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15878 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15879 vertically written Japanese.
15882 \begin_layout Description
15884 \begin_inset space ~
15887 (cropped) This is the same as
15890 \begin_inset space ~
15895 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15896 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15897 to generate good-looking
15898 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15901 \begin_layout Description
15903 \begin_inset space ~
15906 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15910 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15914 \begin_layout Description
15916 \begin_inset space ~
15919 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15923 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15924 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15928 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15929 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15932 \begin_layout Standard
15936 \begin_inset space ~
15945 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15946 works without problems.
15947 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15948 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15952 \begin_inset space ~
15960 \begin_inset space ~
15965 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15973 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15975 \begin_inset Index idx
15978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15979 FileFormats ! XHTML
15985 \begin_inset Index idx
15988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15997 \begin_layout Standard
15998 This file type has the extension
15999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16007 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16011 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
16012 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
16013 When \SpecialChar LyX
16014 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
16015 suitable for the purpose.
16016 For the math output you can choose in the menu
16018 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16019 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16022 between different formats, which are described in section
16024 Math Output in XHTML
16029 \begin_inset space ~
16037 \begin_layout Standard
16038 XHTML output remains
16039 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16043 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16046 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
16047 features are supported yet.
16051 and the World Wide Web
16055 Additional Features
16057 manual, for more information.
16060 \begin_layout Standard
16061 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
16063 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16064 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16070 \begin_layout Subsection
16072 \begin_inset Index idx
16075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16084 \begin_layout Standard
16085 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16086 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16095 or use the toolbar button
16102 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16103 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
16104 \begin_inset space ~
16108 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16110 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16114 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16116 \begin_inset space ~
16120 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16122 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
16127 Further output formats can be selected via
16129 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16130 View (Other Formats)
16132 or the toolbar button
16141 \begin_layout Standard
16142 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16143 viewer window using the menu
16145 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16150 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16151 Update (Other Formats)
16156 \begin_layout Standard
16157 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16160 To have a real output, export your document.
16163 \begin_layout Section
16164 A few Words about Typography
16165 \begin_inset Index idx
16168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16177 \begin_layout Subsection
16178 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16179 \begin_inset Index idx
16182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16189 \begin_inset Index idx
16192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16201 \begin_layout Standard
16202 In \SpecialChar LyX
16204 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16215 character comes in four lengths: the
16227 , and the minus sign:
16228 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16234 \begin_layout Standard
16235 \begin_inset Tabular
16236 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16237 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16238 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16239 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16240 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16241 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16270 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16293 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16301 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16310 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16335 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16337 \begin_inset space ~
16340 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16347 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16372 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16374 \begin_inset space ~
16377 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16398 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16432 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16438 \begin_layout Standard
16439 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16448 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16451 character multiple times in a row.
16452 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16453 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16460 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16472 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16476 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16486 \begin_layout Standard
16487 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16488 math mode and has a length of its own.
16489 Here are some examples:
16492 \begin_layout Enumerate
16493 line- and page-breaks
16494 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16504 \begin_layout Enumerate
16506 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16516 \begin_layout Enumerate
16517 Oh — there's a dash.
16518 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16528 \begin_layout Enumerate
16529 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16533 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16543 \begin_layout Subsection
16545 \begin_inset Index idx
16548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16555 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16557 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16564 \begin_layout Standard
16565 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16566 but automatically in the output.
16567 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16573 \begin_inset Index idx
16576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16583 following the rules of the document language.
16586 \begin_layout Standard
16588 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16592 font and with unusual constructs, like
16593 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16601 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16602 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16603 This is done with the menu
16605 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16606 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16608 \begin_inset space ~
16614 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16616 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16620 \begin_layout Standard
16621 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16622 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16633 would then see the hyphen
16634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16641 as a hyphenation possibility.
16642 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16643 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16644 as described in section
16646 Prevent Hyphenation
16651 \begin_inset space ~
16659 \begin_layout Subsection
16661 \begin_inset Index idx
16664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16673 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16674 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16675 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16677 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
16684 \begin_layout Standard
16685 When \SpecialChar LyX
16686 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16687 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16689 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16695 appropriate amount of space.
16696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16699 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16701 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16702 gets after another word.
16705 \begin_layout Standard
16706 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16707 not work in all cases.
16709 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16720 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16721 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16724 \begin_layout Standard
16725 Here are some examples of
16729 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16732 \begin_layout Itemize
16737 \begin_layout Itemize
16742 \begin_layout Standard
16743 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16746 \begin_layout Itemize
16748 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16752 this is too much space!
16755 \begin_layout Itemize
16760 \begin_layout Standard
16761 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16764 \begin_layout Standard
16765 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16768 \begin_layout Enumerate
16772 \begin_inset space ~
16777 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16778 \begin_inset space ~
16782 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16784 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
16789 \begin_inset Index idx
16792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16793 Spaces ! inter-word
16801 \begin_layout Enumerate
16805 \begin_inset space ~
16810 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16811 \begin_inset space ~
16815 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16817 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
16822 \begin_inset Index idx
16825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16834 \begin_layout Enumerate
16838 \begin_inset space ~
16842 \begin_inset space ~
16846 \begin_inset space ~
16853 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16855 \begin_inset space ~
16860 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16861 This function is also bound to
16864 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16870 \begin_layout Standard
16871 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16874 \begin_layout Itemize
16876 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16880 \begin_inset space \space{}
16883 this is too much space!
16886 \begin_layout Itemize
16887 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
16891 \begin_layout Standard
16892 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16893 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
16895 will take care of this.
16898 \begin_layout Standard
16899 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16903 \begin_inset space ~
16909 feature described in the section
16911 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
16916 Additional Features
16921 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16923 \begin_inset Index idx
16926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16927 Typography ! Quotes
16933 \begin_inset Index idx
16936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16967 \begin_layout Standard
16969 usually sets quotes correctly.
16970 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16971 and use a closing quote at the end.
16973 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16977 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16981 The keyboard character,
16985 , generates this automatically.
16988 \begin_layout Standard
16989 You can specify what character the
16993 key produces using the submenu
16999 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17003 \begin_inset Index idx
17006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17007 Document ! Settings
17017 There are six choices:
17020 \begin_layout Labeling
17021 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17024 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17028 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17034 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17038 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17044 \begin_layout Labeling
17045 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17048 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17052 \begin_inset Quotes srd
17057 Use quotes like ”this”
17060 \begin_layout Labeling
17061 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17064 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17068 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17074 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17078 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17084 \begin_layout Labeling
17085 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17088 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17092 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17098 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17102 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17108 \begin_layout Labeling
17109 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17112 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17116 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17122 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17126 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17132 \begin_layout Labeling
17133 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17136 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17140 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17146 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17150 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17156 \begin_layout Standard
17157 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
17160 arg "quote-insert single"
17166 \begin_layout Subsection
17168 \begin_inset Index idx
17171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17172 Typography ! Ligatures
17178 \begin_inset Index idx
17181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17210 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17212 name "subsec:Ligatures"
17219 \begin_layout Standard
17220 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
17221 print them as single characters.
17222 These groups are known as
17227 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
17228 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
17230 Here are the standard ligatures:
17233 \begin_layout Itemize
17237 \begin_layout Itemize
17241 \begin_layout Itemize
17245 \begin_layout Itemize
17249 \begin_layout Itemize
17253 \begin_layout Standard
17254 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
17257 \begin_layout Standard
17258 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
17259 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
17260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17267 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
17268 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17272 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17276 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17283 To break a ligature, use
17285 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17286 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17288 \begin_inset space ~
17295 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17299 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17306 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17312 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17323 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17331 \begin_layout Subsection
17333 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
17335 \begin_inset Index idx
17338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17346 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17348 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
17355 \begin_layout Standard
17358 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17359 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
17363 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
17366 \begin_layout Description
17368 The name of the game.
17371 \begin_layout Description
17373 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
17377 \begin_layout Description
17379 The \SpecialChar TeX
17380 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
17384 \begin_layout Description
17385 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
17386 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17390 \begin_layout Standard
17391 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17397 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
17401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17405 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
17406 world to give programs geek version numbers.
17407 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
17408 converges to the number
17409 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
17412 : The actual version is
17413 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17421 , the previous one was
17422 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17433 \begin_layout Subsection
17435 \begin_inset Index idx
17438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17447 \begin_layout Standard
17448 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
17449 space between two words.
17450 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
17453 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17457 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17460 for units use the menu
17462 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17463 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17465 \begin_inset space ~
17473 arg "space-insert thin"
17479 \begin_layout Standard
17480 Here is an example to show the differences:
17483 \begin_layout Standard
17484 \begin_inset Tabular
17485 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
17486 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17487 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17488 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17495 \begin_inset space ~
17499 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17511 space between number and unit
17518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17523 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17527 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17539 half space between number and unit
17552 \begin_layout Subsection
17554 \begin_inset Index idx
17557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17558 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17566 \begin_layout Standard
17567 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17569 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17570 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17571 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17572 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17573 These bits of text became known as
17584 \begin_layout Standard
17585 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
17586 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17587 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17588 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17589 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17590 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
17591 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
17592 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
17593 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17594 \begin_inset Newline newline
17602 \begin_inset Newline newline
17610 \begin_inset Newline newline
17613 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17614 preamble of your document to avoid them.
17615 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
17617 \begin_inset space ~
17621 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17623 key "latexcompanion"
17628 \begin_inset space ~
17632 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17638 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17639 's page break mechanism.
17642 \begin_layout Chapter
17643 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
17644 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17646 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
17653 \begin_layout Standard
17654 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
17657 \begin_inset space ~
17663 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
17666 \begin_layout Section
17668 \begin_inset Index idx
17671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17678 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17687 \begin_layout Standard
17689 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
17692 \begin_layout Description
17695 \begin_inset space ~
17698 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
17699 \begin_inset Newline newline
17703 \begin_inset Note Note
17706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17707 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
17715 \begin_layout Description
17716 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
17717 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17718 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17721 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17722 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17724 \begin_inset space ~
17730 \begin_inset Newline newline
17734 \begin_inset Note Comment
17737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17738 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
17747 \begin_layout Description
17749 \begin_inset space ~
17752 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
17753 set in the document settings under
17755 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
17757 \begin_inset space ~
17763 \begin_inset Newline newline
17767 \begin_inset Newline newline
17771 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17780 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17781 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17786 of a comment that appears in the output.
17792 \begin_inset Newline newline
17796 \begin_inset Newline newline
17799 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17802 \begin_layout Standard
17803 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17811 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17815 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17818 \begin_layout Section
17820 \begin_inset Index idx
17823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17830 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17832 name "sec:Footnotes"
17839 \begin_layout Standard
17841 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
17844 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17847 or the toolbar button
17850 arg "footnote-insert"
17862 \begin_inset Graphics
17863 filename clipart/footnote.png
17872 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
17873 's representation of your footnote.
17883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17902 label, the box will
17906 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17907 Clicking on the box label again will close
17920 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17921 and click on the footnote
17936 \begin_layout Standard
17937 Here is an example footnote:
17945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17946 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17954 \begin_layout Standard
17955 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17956 position where the footnote box is placed.
17957 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17958 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
17959 according to the document class.
17961 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
17962 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
17968 ey are described in the
17971 \begin_inset space ~
17979 \begin_layout Section
17981 \begin_inset Index idx
17984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17991 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17993 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
18000 \begin_layout Standard
18001 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
18003 When you insert a margin note via the menu
18005 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18007 \begin_inset space ~
18012 or the toolbar button
18015 arg "marginalnote-insert"
18034 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18038 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18041 appearing within your text.
18042 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18043 's representation of your margin
18052 \begin_layout Standard
18053 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
18057 \begin_inset Marginal
18060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18062 This is a marginal note.
18070 \begin_layout Standard
18071 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
18072 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
18073 pages, right on odd pages.
18076 \begin_layout Standard
18077 For further information about marginal notes see the section
18080 \begin_inset space ~
18088 \begin_inset space ~
18096 \begin_layout Section
18097 Graphics and Images
18098 \begin_inset Index idx
18101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18108 \begin_inset Index idx
18111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18118 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18120 name "sec:Graphics"
18127 \begin_layout Standard
18128 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
18129 you want and click on the toolbar icon
18132 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
18137 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18141 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
18144 \begin_layout Standard
18145 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
18150 tab allows you to choose your image file.
18151 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
18153 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
18154 \begin_inset space ~
18158 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18160 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
18167 \begin_layout Standard
18172 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
18173 of the image in the output.
18174 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
18178 \begin_inset space ~
18182 \begin_inset space ~
18191 \begin_inset space ~
18195 \begin_inset space ~
18199 \begin_inset space ~
18204 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
18205 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
18213 \begin_layout Standard
18217 \begin_inset space ~
18221 \begin_inset space ~
18226 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
18227 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
18229 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
18234 \begin_inset space ~
18239 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
18240 with the image size is printed.
18243 \begin_layout Standard
18244 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
18245 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
18247 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
18250 \begin_layout Standard
18252 \begin_inset Graphics
18253 filename clipart/mobius.eps
18261 \begin_layout Standard
18262 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
18263 the image into a float, see section
18264 \begin_inset space ~
18268 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18270 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
18277 \begin_layout Subsection
18279 \begin_inset Index idx
18282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18289 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18291 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
18298 \begin_layout Standard
18299 You can insert images in any known file format.
18300 But as we explained in section
18301 \begin_inset space ~
18305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18307 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18311 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
18313 therefore uses the program
18317 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
18318 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
18319 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
18320 \begin_inset space ~
18324 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18326 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18333 \begin_layout Standard
18334 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
18337 \begin_layout Description
18339 \begin_inset space ~
18342 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
18343 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
18344 Well-known bitmap image formats are
18345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18348 Graphics Interchange Format
18349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18352 (GIF, file extension
18353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18365 \begin_inset Index idx
18368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18400 Portable Network Graphics
18401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18404 (PNG, file extension
18405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18413 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18417 \begin_inset Index idx
18420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18452 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18456 (JPG, file extension
18457 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18481 \begin_inset Index idx
18484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18515 \begin_layout Description
18517 \begin_inset space ~
18520 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18522 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18523 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18524 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18525 \begin_inset Newline newline
18528 Scalable image formats can be
18529 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18532 Scalable Vector Graphics
18533 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18536 (SVG, file extension
18537 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18549 \begin_inset Index idx
18552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18581 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18584 Encapsulated PostScript
18585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18588 (EPS, file extension
18589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18601 \begin_inset Index idx
18604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18636 Portable Document Format
18637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18640 (PDF, file extension
18641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18653 \begin_inset Index idx
18656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18664 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18668 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18671 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
18672 result will not be scalable.
18673 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
18678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18679 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
18687 \begin_layout Standard
18688 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
18695 \begin_layout Subsection
18696 Grouping of Image Settings
18697 \begin_inset Index idx
18700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18701 Images ! Settings grouping
18709 \begin_layout Standard
18710 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
18712 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
18713 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
18715 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
18716 need to manually change each of them.
18720 \begin_layout Standard
18721 A new group can be set by pressing the button
18724 \begin_inset space ~
18728 \begin_inset space ~
18740 \begin_inset space ~
18744 \begin_inset space ~
18750 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18751 and checking the name of the desired group.
18754 \begin_layout Section
18756 \begin_inset Index idx
18759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18766 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18775 \begin_layout Standard
18776 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18779 arg "tabular-insert"
18784 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18788 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18789 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18790 from the rest of the table.
18791 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18792 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18794 Here is an example table:
18797 \begin_layout Standard
18799 \begin_inset Tabular
18800 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18801 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18802 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18803 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18804 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18805 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19005 \begin_layout Subsection
19009 \begin_layout Standard
19010 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
19013 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
19017 This brings up the table dialog.
19018 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
19019 cursor is placed currently.
19020 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
19021 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
19022 done on all of your selection.
19025 \begin_layout Standard
19026 In addition to the table dialog, the
19029 \begin_inset space ~
19034 helps you in setting table properties.
19035 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
19038 \begin_layout Standard
19042 \begin_inset space ~
19047 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
19048 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
19049 current cell respectively.
19050 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
19052 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
19053 of text, see section
19054 \begin_inset space ~
19058 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19060 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
19067 \begin_layout Standard
19068 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
19069 using the check box
19078 This will merge the cells to
19082 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
19083 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
19084 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
19085 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
19086 in the last row without the upper border:
19089 \begin_layout Standard
19091 \begin_inset Tabular
19092 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
19093 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
19094 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19095 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
19096 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19097 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19108 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19117 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19193 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19228 \begin_layout Standard
19229 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19230 -arguments for the table.
19231 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19232 explained in the chapter
19239 \begin_inset space ~
19245 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
19246 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
19247 but are visible in the output.
19250 \begin_layout Standard
19251 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19259 Most DVI-viewers are
19263 able to display rotations.
19271 \begin_layout Standard
19276 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
19281 adds lines for all cell borders.
19284 \begin_layout Subsection
19286 \begin_inset Index idx
19289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19290 Tables ! Multi-page
19296 \begin_inset Index idx
19299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19308 \begin_layout Standard
19309 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
19312 \begin_inset space ~
19316 \begin_inset space ~
19324 \begin_inset space ~
19329 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
19330 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
19333 \begin_layout Description
19338 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19339 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
19340 Except for the first page, if
19343 \begin_inset space ~
19351 \begin_layout Description
19355 \begin_inset space ~
19360 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19361 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
19364 \begin_layout Description
19369 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19370 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
19371 except for the last page, if
19374 \begin_inset space ~
19382 \begin_layout Description
19386 \begin_inset space ~
19391 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19392 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
19395 \begin_layout Description
19396 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
19397 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
19399 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19403 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
19406 \begin_inset space ~
19414 \begin_layout Standard
19415 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
19416 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
19417 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
19423 In this context, first means first in this order:
19426 \begin_inset space ~
19438 \begin_inset space ~
19443 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
19446 \begin_layout Standard
19448 \begin_inset Tabular
19449 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
19450 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
19451 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
19452 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19453 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19454 <row endfirsthead="true">
19455 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19461 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
19466 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19475 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19485 <row endfirsthead="true">
19486 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19497 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19506 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19518 <row endhead="true">
19519 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19530 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19539 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19549 <row endhead="true">
19550 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19561 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19570 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19582 <row endfoot="true">
19583 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19594 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19603 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19634 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20575 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20584 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20593 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20604 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20635 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20666 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20697 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20728 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20759 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20790 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20821 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20852 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20883 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20914 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20945 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20976 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21007 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21038 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21069 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21100 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21131 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21162 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21193 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21224 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21255 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21286 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21317 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21348 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21379 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21410 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21441 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21472 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21503 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21534 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21564 <row endlastfoot="true">
21565 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21576 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21585 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21602 \begin_layout Subsection
21604 \begin_inset Index idx
21607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21614 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21616 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
21623 \begin_layout Standard
21624 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
21625 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
21626 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
21627 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
21631 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
21634 \begin_layout Standard
21635 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
21636 for the column in the table dialog.
21637 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
21638 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
21642 \begin_layout Standard
21644 \begin_inset Tabular
21645 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
21646 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21647 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21648 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
21649 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21669 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21738 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21794 This is longer now.
21799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21850 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21851 This is longer now.
21856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21882 \begin_layout Standard
21883 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21884 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21889 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21890 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21896 Selection with the mouse or with
21900 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21901 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21902 the selection from outside the table.
21905 \begin_layout Section
21907 \begin_inset Index idx
21910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21917 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21926 \begin_layout Subsection
21930 \begin_layout Standard
21931 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21932 have a fixed location.
21934 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21938 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21941 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21949 \begin_inset space ~
21954 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21955 too many notes on the current page.
21958 \begin_layout Standard
21959 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21960 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21961 and pages without text.
21962 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21963 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21964 Floats are therefore numbered.
21965 Referencing is described in section
21966 \begin_inset space ~
21970 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21972 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21979 \begin_layout Standard
21980 To insert a float, use the menu
21982 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21986 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21987 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21989 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21990 \begin_inset Index idx
21993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21999 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
22000 paragraph within the float.
22001 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
22002 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
22003 left-clicking on the box label.
22004 A closed float box looks like this:
22005 \begin_inset Graphics
22006 filename clipart/float.png
22011 – a gray button with a red label.
22014 \begin_layout Standard
22015 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
22017 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
22020 \begin_layout Subsection
22022 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22024 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
22029 \begin_inset Index idx
22032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22033 Floats ! Figure floats
22041 \begin_layout Standard
22043 \begin_inset space ~
22047 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22049 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22053 was created using the menu
22055 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22056 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22062 arg "float-insert figure"
22066 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
22069 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22075 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
22079 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
22080 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
22082 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
22084 \begin_inset space ~
22092 arg "layout-paragraph"
22098 \begin_layout Standard
22099 \begin_inset Float figure
22104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22106 \begin_inset Graphics
22107 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22117 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22120 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22122 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22126 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
22139 \begin_layout Standard
22140 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
22141 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
22143 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22152 ) and refer to it using the menu
22154 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22160 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
22164 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
22165 vague references like
22166 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22170 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22173 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
22174 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
22176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22184 For more about cross-references, see section
22185 \begin_inset space ~
22189 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22191 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22198 \begin_layout Standard
22199 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22200 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22201 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22202 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22203 as described in section
22204 \begin_inset space ~
22208 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22210 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
22216 \begin_inset space ~
22220 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22222 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22226 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22227 You can also set the images one below the other.
22229 \begin_inset space ~
22233 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22235 reference "fig:Undefinable"
22240 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22242 reference "fig:Platypus"
22246 are the subfigures.
22249 \begin_layout Standard
22250 \begin_inset Float figure
22255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22256 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22260 \begin_inset Float figure
22265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22266 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22269 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22271 name "fig:Undefinable"
22283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22284 \begin_inset Graphics
22285 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
22296 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22300 \begin_inset Float figure
22305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22306 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22309 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22311 name "fig:Platypus"
22323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22324 \begin_inset Graphics
22325 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22337 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22344 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22347 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22349 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22353 Two distorted images.
22366 \begin_layout Subsection
22368 \begin_inset Index idx
22371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22372 Floats ! Table floats
22380 \begin_layout Standard
22381 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
22383 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22384 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22387 or the toolbar button
22390 arg "float-insert table"
22394 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
22395 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
22396 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
22398 \begin_inset space ~
22402 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22404 reference "tab:Table-float"
22411 \begin_layout Standard
22412 \begin_inset Float table
22417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22418 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22421 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22423 name "tab:Table-float"
22435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22437 \begin_inset Tabular
22438 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
22439 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22440 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22441 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22442 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22569 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
22577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22590 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22593 \end{array}\right]$
22601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22614 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
22635 \begin_layout Subsection
22637 \begin_inset Index idx
22640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22649 \begin_layout Standard
22651 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
22652 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
22653 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
22655 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
22663 \begin_inset space ~
22671 \begin_layout Section
22673 \begin_inset Index idx
22676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22685 \begin_layout Standard
22687 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
22689 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22690 \begin_inset space \space{}
22697 \begin_layout Standard
22698 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
22699 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22701 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22705 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22706 and its alignment within the page.
22709 \begin_layout Standard
22711 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22721 height_special "totalheight"
22726 backgroundcolor "none"
22729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22732 This is a minipage.
22733 The text is set in an italic style.
22736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22739 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22740 another formatting.
22748 \begin_layout Standard
22749 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22752 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22756 as described in section
22757 \begin_inset space ~
22761 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22763 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
22768 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22774 \begin_layout Standard
22775 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22785 height_special "totalheight"
22790 backgroundcolor "none"
22793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22794 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22795 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22801 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22805 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22815 height_special "totalheight"
22820 backgroundcolor "none"
22823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22824 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22825 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22833 \begin_layout Standard
22834 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22840 \begin_layout Standard
22841 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22843 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22850 \begin_inset space ~
22858 \begin_layout Chapter
22859 Mathematical Formulas
22860 \begin_inset Index idx
22863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22870 \begin_inset Index idx
22873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22902 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22904 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22911 \begin_layout Standard
22912 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22917 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22920 \begin_layout Section
22922 \begin_inset Index idx
22925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22934 \begin_layout Standard
22935 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22948 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22950 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22951 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22952 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22954 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22960 \begin_layout Standard
22961 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22965 \begin_inset space ~
22970 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22973 \begin_layout Standard
22974 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22975 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22978 \begin_layout Standard
22979 This is a line with an inline formula
22980 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22986 \begin_layout Standard
22987 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22988 paragraph, like this one:
22989 \begin_inset Formula
22996 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22999 \begin_layout Standard
23001 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
23003 For example, typing
23004 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23014 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23017 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
23018 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
23022 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
23025 \begin_inset space ~
23033 \begin_layout Subsection
23034 Navigating in Formulas
23035 \begin_inset Index idx
23038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23047 \begin_layout Standard
23048 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
23049 achieved with the arrow keys.
23051 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
23052 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
23057 will leave a formula construct (a square root
23058 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
23062 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
23066 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23069 \end{array}\right]$
23077 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
23082 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
23083 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
23086 \begin_layout Standard
23091 , printed in this document as
23092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23096 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23103 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
23104 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
23105 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
23110 For example, if you want
23111 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
23119 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23129 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23133 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23138 , since in the latter case only the
23141 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
23146 will be under the square root sign:
23147 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
23153 \begin_layout Standard
23154 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
23156 \begin_inset Formula
23158 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23167 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
23168 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
23171 \begin_layout Subsection
23175 \begin_layout Standard
23176 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
23177 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
23181 and a cursor movement key to select text.
23182 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
23183 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
23184 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
23185 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
23189 \begin_layout Subsection
23190 Exponents and Subscripts
23191 \begin_inset Index idx
23194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23201 \begin_inset Index idx
23204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23213 \begin_layout Standard
23214 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23217 arg "math-superscript"
23223 arg "math-subscript"
23226 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23228 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23231 , type in a formula
23234 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23244 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
23250 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
23254 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
23260 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23266 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
23268 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23272 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23275 , you have to use an extra
23279 to separate the circumflex and the character.
23280 For example, if you want
23281 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
23287 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23293 Subscripts are similar: To get
23294 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
23300 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23308 \begin_layout Subsection
23310 \begin_inset Index idx
23313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23322 \begin_layout Standard
23323 Create a fraction either with the command
23329 or by using the icon
23332 arg "math-insert \\frac"
23338 \begin_inset space ~
23344 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
23345 The cursor is above the fraction line.
23346 To move it to the bottom, simply press
23351 To move back up, press
23356 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
23357 \begin_inset Formula
23359 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
23362 \end{array}\right)}\right]
23370 \begin_layout Subsection
23372 \begin_inset Index idx
23375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23384 \begin_layout Standard
23385 Roots can be created using the
23388 \begin_inset space ~
23396 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
23402 arg "math-insert \\root"
23424 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
23430 always produces a square root.
23433 \begin_layout Subsection
23434 Operators with Limits
23435 \begin_inset Index idx
23438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23445 \begin_inset Index idx
23448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23455 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23457 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23464 \begin_layout Standard
23466 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
23470 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
23473 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
23474 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
23475 by entering them as you would enter a super-
23476 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
23477 The sum operator will automatically place its
23478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23485 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
23487 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
23491 \begin_inset Formula
23493 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
23498 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
23502 \begin_layout Standard
23503 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
23505 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
23506 behind the operator and using the menu
23508 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23509 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
23511 \begin_inset space ~
23515 \begin_inset space ~
23529 \begin_layout Standard
23530 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23539 \begin_inset Index idx
23542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23549 \begin_inset Formula
23551 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
23556 which will place the
23557 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
23561 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23565 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23569 In inline formulas it looks like this:
23570 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
23576 \begin_layout Standard
23577 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
23584 Have a look at section
23585 \begin_inset space ~
23589 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23591 reference "subsec:Functions"
23595 for an explanation of function macros.
23598 \begin_layout Subsection
23600 \begin_inset Index idx
23603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23612 \begin_layout Standard
23613 Most math symbols can be found in the
23616 \begin_inset space ~
23621 under one of several categories; including
23638 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
23642 \begin_layout Standard
23643 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
23644 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
23645 don't have to use the
23648 \begin_inset space ~
23653 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23655 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23658 \begin_layout Subsection
23660 \begin_inset Index idx
23663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23672 \begin_layout Standard
23673 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23679 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
23685 \begin_inset space ~
23693 arg "math-insert \\space"
23697 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23698 For example, the sequence
23703 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
23706 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
23708 \begin_inset Graphics
23709 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23714 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23715 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23716 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23717 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
23718 , because they are negative
23720 Here are two examples:
23723 \begin_layout Standard
23733 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23739 \begin_layout Standard
23749 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
23755 \begin_layout Subsection
23757 \begin_inset Index idx
23760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23767 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23769 name "subsec:Functions"
23776 \begin_layout Standard
23780 \begin_inset space ~
23785 contains under the button
23788 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23791 a number of function macros, such as
23792 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23796 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23804 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23811 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23812 avoid confusions, because
23813 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23817 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23823 \begin_layout Standard
23824 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23826 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23830 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23836 \begin_layout Standard
23837 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23838 are placed, as described in section
23839 \begin_inset space ~
23843 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23845 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23852 \begin_layout Subsection
23854 \begin_inset Index idx
23857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23866 \begin_layout Standard
23867 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23869 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23870 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
23871 commands, for example, to enter
23872 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23875 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23876 Our example is entered by typing
23881 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23888 \begin_inset space ~
23892 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23894 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23898 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23901 \begin_layout Standard
23902 \begin_inset Float table
23907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23908 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23911 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23913 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23917 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23927 \begin_inset Tabular
23928 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23929 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23930 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23931 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23932 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24016 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24070 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
24080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24124 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
24134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24178 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
24188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24232 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
24242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24286 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
24296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24340 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
24350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24394 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
24404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24448 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
24458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24493 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24514 \begin_layout Standard
24515 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24518 \begin_inset space ~
24526 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24529 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24533 \begin_layout Section
24534 Brackets and Delimiters
24535 \begin_inset Index idx
24538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24545 \begin_inset Index idx
24548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24555 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24557 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24564 \begin_layout Standard
24565 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
24567 For some purposes, using just the keys
24572 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
24573 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
24574 toolbar delimiter icon
24577 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24581 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
24582 \begin_inset Formula
24584 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24592 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
24593 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
24597 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24600 and the expression on the right was entered using the
24606 \begin_inset Formula
24608 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
24616 \begin_layout Standard
24617 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
24618 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
24622 \begin_layout Standard
24623 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
24624 left side and right side.
24625 If you use the option
24628 \begin_inset space ~
24633 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
24634 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
24636 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
24641 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
24642 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
24645 \begin_layout Standard
24646 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
24647 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
24648 is to go inside the brackets.
24649 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24654 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24655 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24656 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
24660 arg "math-delim ( )"
24666 \begin_layout Section
24667 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24668 \begin_inset Index idx
24671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24678 \begin_inset Index idx
24681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24688 \begin_inset Index idx
24691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24692 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24700 \begin_layout Standard
24701 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24705 \begin_inset space ~
24713 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24717 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24718 Here is an example:
24719 \begin_inset Formula
24721 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24730 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24731 \begin_inset space ~
24735 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24737 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24742 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24743 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24744 This alignment is set in the box
24749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24773 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24781 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24787 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24798 for every column as default.
24799 For example, the sequence
24800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24811 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24812 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24813 corresponds to the relevant column.
24814 The result will look like this:
24815 \begin_inset Formula
24818 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
24819 column & has & has\,right\\
24820 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
24829 \begin_layout Standard
24830 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24833 arg "newline-insert newline"
24836 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24837 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24839 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24842 or the math toolbar.
24845 \begin_layout Standard
24846 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24847 It can be created with the menu
24849 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24850 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24852 \begin_inset space ~
24864 Here is an example:
24865 \begin_inset Formula
24879 \begin_layout Standard
24880 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24883 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24886 arg "newline-insert newline"
24890 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24895 arg "newline-insert newline"
24898 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24906 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24907 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24908 A new row is created by every further entry of
24911 arg "newline-insert newline"
24915 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24916 Here is an example:
24917 \begin_inset Formula
24919 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24920 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24925 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24926 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24927 \begin_inset Formula
24929 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24937 \begin_layout Standard
24938 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24945 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24946 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24947 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24949 reference "eq:asquared"
24954 The other types are described in section
24955 \begin_inset space ~
24959 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24961 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
24968 \begin_layout Section
24969 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24970 \begin_inset Index idx
24973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24974 Math ! Formula numbering
24980 \begin_inset Index idx
24983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24984 Math ! Referencing formulas
24990 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24992 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
24999 \begin_layout Standard
25000 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
25002 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25003 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25005 \begin_inset space ~
25009 \begin_inset space ~
25017 arg "math-number-toggle"
25021 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25022 within parentheses.
25023 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
25024 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
25025 the document class.
25026 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
25027 separated by a dot:
25028 \begin_inset Formula
25038 arg "math-number-toggle"
25041 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
25042 You can only number displayed formulas.
25045 \begin_layout Standard
25046 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
25048 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25049 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25051 \begin_inset space ~
25055 \begin_inset space ~
25063 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
25066 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
25067 \begin_inset Formula
25070 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
25076 To number all lines use the shortcut
25079 arg "math-number-toggle"
25085 \begin_layout Standard
25086 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25089 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
25090 A label is inserted with the menu
25092 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25101 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
25102 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
25103 It is recommended that you use the suggested
25104 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25115 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
25116 label type when you have many labels in your document.
25117 We inserted in the following example the label
25118 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25122 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25125 in the second line:
25126 \begin_inset Formula
25128 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
25129 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
25134 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
25135 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
25136 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
25138 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25140 \begin_inset space ~
25148 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25152 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
25153 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25154 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
25155 as the formula number:
25158 \begin_layout Standard
25159 This is a cross-reference to equation (
25160 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25162 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25169 \begin_layout Standard
25170 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
25171 's cross-reference box are described in section
25172 \begin_inset space ~
25176 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25178 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25183 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
25191 \begin_layout Section
25192 User defined math macros
25193 \begin_inset Index idx
25196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25205 \begin_layout Standard
25207 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
25208 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
25209 Math macros are explained in section
25212 \begin_inset space ~
25224 \begin_layout Section
25228 \begin_layout Subsection
25230 \begin_inset Index idx
25233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25242 \begin_layout Standard
25243 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
25244 To set a font in a formula, use the
25247 \begin_inset space ~
25255 arg "math-insert \\font"
25258 , or enter its command, listed in table
25259 \begin_inset space ~
25263 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25265 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25272 \begin_layout Standard
25273 \begin_inset Float table
25278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25279 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25282 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25284 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25288 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
25296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25298 \begin_inset Tabular
25299 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
25300 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25301 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25302 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25334 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
25342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25361 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
25369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25388 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
25396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25421 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
25429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25448 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
25456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25475 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
25483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25509 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25536 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
25544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25570 \begin_layout Standard
25571 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25579 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
25595 \begin_layout Standard
25596 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
25597 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
25602 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
25603 space when you need a space in the box.
25604 Here is an example where
25605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25616 denotes the set of numbers:
25617 \begin_inset Formula
25619 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
25627 \begin_layout Standard
25628 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
25629 You can, for example, put a character in
25638 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
25642 \begin_inset Newline newline
25645 So it is better not to use this feature.
25648 \begin_layout Standard
25649 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25650 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25654 \begin_inset Newline newline
25657 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25663 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25664 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25670 \begin_layout Standard
25677 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25680 \begin_layout Standard
25681 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25683 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25684 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25686 \begin_inset space ~
25694 \begin_layout Subsection
25696 \begin_inset Index idx
25699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25708 \begin_layout Standard
25709 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25711 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25715 \begin_inset space ~
25719 \begin_inset space ~
25727 \begin_inset space ~
25735 arg "math-insert \\font"
25739 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25740 in black instead of blue.
25741 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25742 Here is an example:
25743 \begin_inset Formula
25746 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25747 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25756 \begin_layout Subsection
25758 \begin_inset Index idx
25761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25770 \begin_layout Standard
25771 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25772 automatically chosen in most situations.
25790 For most characters,
25798 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25799 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25804 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25805 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
25806 thinks are appropriate.
25807 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25810 arg "math-insert \\style"
25814 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25815 For example, you can set
25816 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25819 , which is normally in
25828 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25832 The four styles are used in the following example:
25835 \begin_layout Standard
25836 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25840 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25844 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25848 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25854 \begin_layout Standard
25855 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25856 is set in a particular size with the menu
25858 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25860 \begin_inset space ~
25865 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25866 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25867 will be adjusted to correspond.
25868 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25879 \begin_layout Standard
25883 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25889 \begin_layout Section
25890 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25892 \begin_inset Index idx
25895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25902 \begin_inset Index idx
25905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25914 \begin_layout Standard
25916 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
25917 that are in common use.
25920 \begin_layout Subsection
25921 Enabling AMS-Support
25924 \begin_layout Standard
25925 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25926 the document by selecting the checkbox
25929 \begin_inset space ~
25933 \begin_inset space ~
25937 \begin_inset space ~
25944 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25948 \begin_inset Index idx
25951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25952 Document ! Settings
25960 \begin_inset space ~
25966 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
25967 -errors in formulas,
25968 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25971 \begin_layout Subsection
25973 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25975 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
25980 \begin_inset Index idx
25983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25984 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25992 \begin_layout Standard
25993 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25994 provides a selection of different formula types.
25996 allows you to choose between
26017 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
26018 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26024 , for an explanation of these formula types.
26027 \begin_layout Chapter
26031 \begin_layout Section
26033 \begin_inset Index idx
26036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26043 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26045 name "sec:Cross-References"
26052 \begin_layout Standard
26053 One of \SpecialChar LyX
26054 's strengths is cross-references.
26055 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
26057 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
26058 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
26059 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
26062 \begin_layout Enumerate
26066 \begin_layout Enumerate
26067 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26069 name "enu:Second-item"
26076 \begin_layout Enumerate
26080 \begin_layout Standard
26081 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
26083 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26086 or by pressing the toolbar button
26093 A gray label box like this:
26094 \begin_inset Graphics
26095 filename clipart/label.png
26099 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
26101 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
26103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26124 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26136 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
26137 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
26139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26153 \begin_layout Standard
26154 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
26156 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26159 or the toolbar button
26162 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26166 A gray cross-reference box like this:
26167 \begin_inset Graphics
26168 filename clipart/reference.png
26172 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
26174 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
26175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26187 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
26191 \begin_layout Standard
26192 As an alternative to
26194 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26197 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
26202 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
26203 to the actual cursor position via the menu
26205 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26217 \begin_layout Standard
26218 Here is our cross-reference: Item
26219 \begin_inset space ~
26223 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26225 reference "enu:Second-item"
26232 \begin_layout Standard
26233 It is recommended to use a protected space
26237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26238 described in section
26239 \begin_inset space ~
26243 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26245 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
26254 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
26255 line breaks between them.
26258 \begin_layout Standard
26259 There are six formats of cross-references:
26262 \begin_layout Description
26263 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
26264 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26266 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26273 \begin_layout Description
26274 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
26275 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
26277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26287 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26294 \begin_layout Description
26295 <page>: prints the page number: Page
26296 \begin_inset space ~
26300 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26301 LatexCommand pageref
26302 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26309 \begin_layout Description
26311 \begin_inset space ~
26315 \begin_inset space ~
26318 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
26319 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26320 LatexCommand vpageref
26321 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26326 \begin_inset Newline newline
26329 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
26330 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
26331 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
26332 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
26333 it prints “on the next page”.
26334 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
26337 \begin_layout Description
26339 \begin_inset space ~
26343 \begin_inset space ~
26347 \begin_inset space ~
26350 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
26351 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26353 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26358 \begin_inset Newline newline
26361 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
26367 ; otherwise it behaves like
26371 \begin_inset space ~
26375 \begin_inset space ~
26384 \begin_layout Description
26386 \begin_inset space ~
26389 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
26390 \begin_inset Newline newline
26394 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26402 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26412 \begin_inset Index idx
26415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26417 -packages ! prettyref
26423 \begin_inset Index idx
26426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26428 -packages ! refstyle
26439 \begin_inset Newline newline
26442 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
26443 -package should be used for this feature by setting
26446 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
26450 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26451 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26459 is the default and preferred because
26463 supports only English documents.
26464 The format is specified by using the command
26476 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26477 preamble of the document.
26478 For example, if you are using
26482 , then redefining all references to figures (which have the label shortcut
26484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26495 ) can be done with this command
26496 \begin_inset Newline newline
26503 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26508 \begin_inset Newline newline
26511 Please note that neither
26519 (nor LyX itself) defines reference formats for all available types.
26520 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
26522 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
26523 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
26528 , you might do so as follows:
26529 \begin_inset Newline newline
26536 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
26541 \begin_inset Newline newline
26544 For more information about the defining formatted references, have a look
26545 at the package documentations,
26546 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26548 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26555 \begin_layout Description
26557 \begin_inset space ~
26560 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26561 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26562 LatexCommand nameref
26563 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26570 \begin_layout Standard
26571 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26572 is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
26574 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26578 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
26582 \begin_layout Standard
26583 You can only use the style
26587 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26591 is always possible.
26594 \begin_layout Standard
26595 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26596 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26598 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26599 \begin_inset space ~
26603 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26605 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26612 \begin_layout Standard
26613 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26617 \begin_inset space ~
26621 \begin_inset space ~
26626 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26627 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
26630 \begin_inset space ~
26635 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
26636 You can also go back with the toolbar button
26639 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
26645 \begin_layout Standard
26646 You can change labels at any time.
26647 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
26648 do not need to think about this.
26651 \begin_layout Standard
26652 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
26654 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
26658 \begin_layout Standard
26659 References are described in detail in the section
26660 \begin_inset space ~
26670 \begin_inset space ~
26678 \begin_layout Section
26679 Table of Contents and other Listings
26680 \begin_inset Index idx
26683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26690 \begin_inset Index idx
26693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26694 Navigating ! Outline
26700 \begin_inset Index idx
26703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26710 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26719 \begin_layout Subsection
26721 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26723 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
26730 \begin_layout Standard
26731 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26733 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26734 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
26736 \begin_inset space ~
26740 \begin_inset space ~
26746 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
26748 If you click on it, the
26752 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26753 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26754 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26756 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
26758 \begin_inset space ~
26763 that is described in section
26764 \begin_inset space ~
26768 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26770 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
26777 \begin_layout Standard
26778 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26779 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26781 \begin_inset space ~
26785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26787 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26791 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26793 \begin_inset space ~
26797 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26799 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
26803 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26805 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26808 \begin_layout Subsection
26809 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
26810 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26812 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
26819 \begin_layout Standard
26820 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
26822 You can insert them via the
26824 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26828 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26831 \begin_layout Section
26832 URLs and Hyperlinks
26833 \begin_inset Index idx
26836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26843 \begin_inset Index idx
26846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26855 \begin_layout Subsection
26857 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26866 \begin_layout Standard
26867 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26869 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26875 \begin_layout Standard
26876 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
26878 \begin_inset Flex URL
26881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26891 \begin_layout Standard
26892 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26898 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26902 \begin_layout Standard
26903 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26911 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
26920 \begin_layout Subsection
26922 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26924 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
26931 \begin_layout Standard
26932 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26934 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26937 or with the toolbar button
26944 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26953 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26954 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26955 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26957 name "LyX's homepage"
26958 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26962 , an Email address like this:
26963 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26965 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26966 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26971 , or a link to a file.
26974 \begin_layout Standard
26975 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26977 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26988 to the link target.
26991 \begin_layout Standard
26992 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26993 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26994 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26995 the text style dialog.
26996 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
27000 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27002 name "LyX's homepage"
27003 target "http://www.lyx.org"
27010 \begin_layout Standard
27011 The link text color can be changed, when the option
27015 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
27017 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27018 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27022 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
27024 \begin_inset Newline newline
27032 \begin_inset Newline newline
27039 in the PDF Properties dialog.
27042 \begin_layout Section
27044 \begin_inset Index idx
27047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27054 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27056 name "sec:Appendices"
27063 \begin_layout Standard
27064 Appendices are created with the menu
27066 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27068 \begin_inset space ~
27072 \begin_inset space ~
27078 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
27079 as the appendix part of the book.
27080 This part is marked with a red borderline.
27083 \begin_layout Standard
27084 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
27085 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
27086 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
27087 and the subsection number.
27088 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
27092 \begin_layout Standard
27094 \begin_inset space ~
27098 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27100 reference "chap:Credits"
27105 \begin_inset space ~
27109 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27111 reference "subsec:Export"
27118 \begin_layout Section
27120 \begin_inset Index idx
27123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27130 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27132 name "sec:Bibliography"
27139 \begin_layout Standard
27140 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
27142 You can include a bibliography database,
27146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27147 Known under the name
27148 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27151 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27153 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27161 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
27162 manually, using the paragraph environment
27166 , which was described in section
27167 \begin_inset space ~
27171 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27173 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
27178 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
27179 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
27183 use a bibliography database.
27186 \begin_layout Subsection
27187 The Bibliography Environment
27190 \begin_layout Standard
27195 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
27197 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
27206 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
27208 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
27211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27218 , a short form of its title, as the key.
27221 \begin_layout Standard
27222 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
27224 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27227 or the toolbar button
27230 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
27234 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
27235 containing the available citations.
27236 Select one or more keys from the list and
27246 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
27247 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
27251 \begin_layout Standard
27252 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
27253 entry with surrounding brackets.
27258 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
27259 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
27261 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27271 \begin_layout Standard
27275 Companion Second Edition
27278 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27280 key "latexcompanion"
27287 \begin_layout Standard
27288 The \SpecialChar LyX
27289 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
27290 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27299 \begin_layout Standard
27300 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
27303 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27305 \begin_inset space ~
27313 arg "layout-paragraph"
27317 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
27320 \begin_layout Subsection
27321 Bibliography databases (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27323 \begin_inset Index idx
27326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27327 Bibliography ! Databases
27333 \begin_inset Index idx
27336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27337 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27344 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27346 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
27353 \begin_layout Standard
27354 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
27359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27360 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
27362 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
27363 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
27368 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
27370 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
27371 your working field in a database.
27372 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
27373 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
27374 list for that document.
27375 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
27379 \begin_layout Standard
27380 The database is a text file with the file extension
27381 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27389 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27392 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
27393 The format is explained in
27394 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27400 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27402 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27404 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
27409 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
27410 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
27411 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
27413 \begin_inset Flex URL
27416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27418 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
27426 \begin_layout Standard
27427 To use a database, use the menu
27429 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27434 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27436 \begin_inset space ~
27442 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
27443 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
27450 Add bibliography to TOC
27452 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
27457 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
27458 in the document or just the cited references.
27461 \begin_layout Standard
27462 The style file is a text file with the file extension
27463 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27471 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27474 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
27475 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
27476 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
27477 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
27479 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
27484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27485 For information on how this is done, have a look at
27486 \begin_inset Newline newline
27490 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27492 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
27504 \begin_layout Standard
27505 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
27508 \begin_layout Standard
27509 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
27510 uses the program Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27512 You can choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
27519 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27520 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27525 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
27526 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
27527 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
27531 The following variants are possible:
27534 \begin_layout Description
27535 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
27536 with other bibliography packages (e.
27537 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27541 \begin_inset space \space{}
27548 ), only with the package
27552 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
27556 \begin_layout Description
27557 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
27558 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
27559 with all bibliography packages, except
27564 \begin_layout Description
27565 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
27570 , works with all bibliography packages
27573 \begin_layout Standard
27574 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27575 can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
27577 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
27580 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27584 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27593 \begin_layout Standard
27594 When you select the option
27596 Sectioned bibliography
27600 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27601 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27604 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
27605 This and other options are explained in detail in section
27607 Customizing Bibliographies
27611 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27616 Additional Features
27621 \begin_layout Standard
27622 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
27623 the two methods of creating them.
27624 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
27625 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
27626 We used the style file
27630 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
27633 \begin_layout Subsection
27635 \begin_inset Index idx
27638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27639 Bibliography ! Citation format
27647 \begin_layout Standard
27648 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
27649 For this feature you need to enable the option
27655 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27659 \begin_inset Index idx
27662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27663 Document ! Settings
27673 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
27674 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27675 style files as explained in
27676 the previous section.
27679 \begin_layout Standard
27680 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
27681 the citation reference window.
27682 Here is an example where the text
27683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27687 \begin_inset space ~
27691 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27694 appears after the reference:
27697 \begin_layout Standard
27699 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27702 key "latexcompanion"
27709 \begin_layout Section
27711 \begin_inset Index idx
27714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27721 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27730 \begin_layout Standard
27731 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27733 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27735 \begin_inset space ~
27740 or the toolbar button
27747 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27748 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27749 by \SpecialChar LyX
27750 as the index entry.
27753 \begin_layout Standard
27754 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27756 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27757 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27759 \begin_inset space ~
27765 A light blue box labeled
27766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27777 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27778 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
27782 \begin_layout Standard
27783 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27784 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
27785 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
27786 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27788 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27790 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27797 \begin_layout Subsection
27798 Grouping Index Entries
27799 \begin_inset Index idx
27802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27811 \begin_layout Standard
27812 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27814 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27815 lists under the entry
27816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27824 First we create the entry
27825 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27829 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27833 \begin_inset space ~
27837 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27839 reference "subsec:Lists"
27844 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27845 \begin_inset space ~
27849 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27851 reference "sec:Itemize"
27855 , we insert the command
27858 \begin_layout Standard
27864 \begin_layout Standard
27868 \begin_layout Standard
27874 \begin_layout Standard
27875 for the enumerated list in section
27876 \begin_inset space ~
27880 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27882 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27889 \begin_layout Standard
27890 The exclamation mark
27891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27898 marks the grouping levels.
27899 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27900 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27901 If we don't have an index entry for
27902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27909 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27912 \begin_layout Subsection
27914 \begin_inset Index idx
27917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27918 Index ! Page ranges
27926 \begin_layout Standard
27927 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27929 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27930 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27931 an index entry in section
27932 \begin_inset space ~
27936 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27938 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27945 \begin_layout Standard
27948 Paragraph environments|(
27951 \begin_layout Standard
27952 and another entry at the end of section
27953 \begin_inset space ~
27957 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27959 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
27966 \begin_layout Standard
27969 Paragraph environments|)
27972 \begin_layout Standard
27974 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27982 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27986 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27994 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27997 respectively start and end the index range.
27998 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27999 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
28000 the pages of the indexed document parts.
28001 An example is the index entry
28002 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28005 Document ! Settings
28006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28012 \begin_layout Subsection
28014 \begin_inset Index idx
28017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28018 Index ! Cross referencing
28026 \begin_layout Standard
28027 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
28028 We referred for example in the index entry
28029 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28037 \begin_inset space ~
28041 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28043 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
28047 ) to the index entry
28048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28052 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28055 in the same section using the entry
28058 \begin_layout Standard
28061 GIF|see{Image formats}
28064 \begin_layout Standard
28065 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
28067 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
28068 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
28071 \begin_layout Subsection
28073 \begin_inset Index idx
28076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28077 Index ! Entry order
28085 \begin_layout Standard
28086 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
28087 follow the rules for the index order.
28088 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
28093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28094 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
28096 \begin_inset space ~
28100 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28102 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28111 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
28112 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
28113 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28117 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28121 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28125 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28129 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28133 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28137 \begin_inset Index idx
28140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28141 Dummy entries ! maïs
28147 \begin_inset Index idx
28150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28151 Dummy entries ! maître
28157 \begin_inset Index idx
28160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28161 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
28166 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
28167 maïs, maison, maître.
28168 To achieve this, we use the command
28171 \begin_layout Standard
28174 previous entry@current entry
28177 \begin_layout Standard
28178 In our case we want to have
28179 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28187 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28191 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28194 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
28197 \begin_layout Standard
28203 \begin_layout Standard
28204 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
28205 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
28207 See the next subsection for an example.
28210 \begin_layout Standard
28211 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28217 \begin_layout Standard
28218 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
28223 to generate the index (see section
28224 \begin_inset space ~
28228 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28230 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28239 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28240 -package aeguill in section
28241 \begin_inset space ~
28245 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28247 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
28251 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
28252 -packages although all these index
28253 commands start with
28254 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28267 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
28272 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
28275 \begin_layout Standard
28287 \begin_layout Standard
28299 \begin_layout Subsection
28301 \begin_inset Index idx
28304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28305 Index ! Entry layout
28313 \begin_layout Standard
28314 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
28315 \begin_inset Index idx
28318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28321 This is an italic dummy entry
28326 You can also format the page number using the character
28327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28334 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28335 -command without a backslash.
28336 We can write for example
28339 \begin_layout Standard
28342 italic page number:|textit
28345 \begin_layout Standard
28346 to get the page number in italic.
28347 \begin_inset Index idx
28350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28351 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
28356 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
28357 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
28359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28367 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28375 \begin_inset space ~
28381 Have a look at section
28382 \begin_inset space ~
28386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28388 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28392 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28396 \begin_layout Standard
28397 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28405 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
28409 to generate the index, see section
28410 \begin_inset space ~
28414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28416 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28425 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
28430 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
28431 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28434 key "latexcompanion"
28446 \begin_layout Standard
28447 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
28449 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
28450 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
28451 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
28452 If so, put the following in the preamble
28455 \begin_layout Standard
28467 \begin_layout Standard
28471 \begin_layout Standard
28477 \begin_layout Standard
28478 in the index entry.
28479 \begin_inset Index idx
28482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28483 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
28488 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
28489 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
28490 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
28493 \begin_layout Standard
28494 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
28495 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
28496 a bold font for all index entries.
28497 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
28509 documentation for details,
28510 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28512 key "makeindex,xindy"
28519 \begin_layout Subsection
28521 \begin_inset Index idx
28524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28531 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28533 name "subsec:Index-Program"
28540 \begin_layout Standard
28541 If the index generation program
28545 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
28546 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
28550 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
28551 distribution, is used.
28555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28560 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
28561 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
28562 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
28563 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
28564 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
28574 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
28576 dialog, see section
28577 \begin_inset space ~
28581 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28583 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
28588 The available options are listed and explained in
28589 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28591 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
28596 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
28600 \begin_layout Standard
28601 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
28602 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
28605 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28606 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28610 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28611 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
28614 \begin_layout Subsection
28618 \begin_layout Standard
28619 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
28620 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
28621 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28625 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28628 next to the standard index.
28630 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
28631 that add this feature.
28638 \begin_inset Index idx
28641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28643 -packages ! splitidx
28648 package to generate multiple indexes.
28649 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
28654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28655 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
28657 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28664 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28665 style, but it also includes
28666 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
28667 Please consult the package's manual for details.
28675 \begin_layout Standard
28676 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
28677 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
28679 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28680 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28683 and select the option
28685 Use multiple Indexes
28692 already contains the standard index
28693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28701 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
28702 also appear as a heading) to the
28706 input field and press the
28711 The new index now also appears in the list.
28712 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
28713 label color to the new index.
28716 \begin_layout Standard
28717 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28720 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28727 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28728 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28729 are additional features:
28732 \begin_layout Itemize
28733 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28734 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28737 \begin_layout Itemize
28738 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28739 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28747 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28748 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28749 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28750 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28753 \begin_layout Section
28754 Nomenclature/Glossary
28755 \begin_inset Index idx
28758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28765 \begin_inset Index idx
28768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28797 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28799 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28806 \begin_layout Standard
28807 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28808 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28809 called nomenclature or glossary.
28812 \begin_layout Standard
28813 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28820 \begin_inset Index idx
28823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28825 -packages ! nomencl
28831 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
28833 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28839 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28843 \begin_layout Standard
28844 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28845 and then use the menu
28847 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28853 \begin_inset space ~
28858 or the toolbar button
28861 arg "nomencl-insert"
28866 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28874 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28877 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28880 \begin_layout Standard
28881 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28882 The first is the term or
28886 that you wish to define.
28891 of the term or symbol.
28894 \begin_layout Standard
28895 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28903 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
28904 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28912 \begin_layout Subsection
28913 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28914 \begin_inset Index idx
28917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28918 Nomenclature ! Layout
28926 \begin_layout Standard
28927 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28931 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
28934 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28938 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28946 \begin_inset Newline newline
28954 \begin_inset Newline newline
28960 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28964 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28967 character starts/ends the formula.
28968 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
28969 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
28971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28977 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28981 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28991 \begin_layout Standard
28992 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28993 -syntax is given in section
28994 \begin_inset space ~
28998 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29000 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
29007 \begin_layout Standard
29011 \begin_inset space ~
29016 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
29018 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
29019 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29023 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29030 in this document is:
29031 \begin_inset Newline newline
29036 dummy entry for the character
29041 \begin_inset Newline newline
29053 \begin_inset space ~
29063 font use the command
29092 \begin_layout Standard
29093 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
29094 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29098 \begin_inset space \space{}
29102 \begin_inset Newline newline
29118 \begin_inset Newline newline
29121 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
29122 This command will make the font of all symbols
29129 \begin_inset space ~
29137 \begin_layout Standard
29138 If the characters |
29139 \begin_inset space \space{}
29143 \begin_inset space \space{}
29147 \begin_inset space \space{}
29151 \begin_inset space \space{}
29155 \begin_inset space \space{}
29158 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
29159 a quote character in front of them.
29160 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29161 LatexCommand nomenclature
29162 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
29163 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
29170 \begin_layout Subsection
29171 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
29172 \begin_inset Index idx
29175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29176 Nomenclature ! Sort order
29184 \begin_layout Standard
29185 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29186 -code of the symbol
29188 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
29190 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
29193 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29194 LatexCommand nomenclature
29196 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
29203 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29207 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29208 LatexCommand nomenclature
29211 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
29216 They will be sorted by
29217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29229 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29243 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29246 will be sorted before the
29250 since the character
29251 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29255 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29258 is considered in sorting.
29261 \begin_layout Standard
29262 To control the sort order, you can edit the
29265 \begin_inset space ~
29270 field of the nomenclature dialog.
29271 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
29273 For the example given, you can insert
29277 in this field for the
29278 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29285 will be located before
29286 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29292 \begin_layout Standard
29293 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
29298 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29307 \begin_layout Subsection
29308 Nomenclature Options
29309 \begin_inset Index idx
29312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29313 Nomenclature ! Options
29321 \begin_layout Standard
29326 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
29327 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
29330 \begin_layout Description
29331 refeq Appends the phrase
29332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29347 to every nomenclature entry, where
29353 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
29356 \begin_layout Description
29357 refpage Appends the phrase
29358 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29373 to every nomenclature entry, where
29379 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
29382 \begin_layout Description
29383 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
29386 \begin_layout Standard
29387 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
29388 class options list in the
29390 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29394 In this document the options
29401 \begin_layout Standard
29402 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29408 \begin_layout Standard
29409 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
29410 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
29415 field in the nomenclature dialog:
29418 \begin_layout Description
29428 \begin_layout Description
29431 nomrefpage Like the
29438 \begin_layout Description
29441 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
29450 \begin_layout Description
29454 \begin_inset space ~
29460 \begin_inset space ~
29465 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
29468 \begin_layout Standard
29470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29477 are automatically translated for some document languages.
29478 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
29482 \begin_layout Standard
29490 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
29493 \begin_inset Newline newline
29500 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
29505 \begin_inset Newline newline
29509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29524 by their translation.
29527 \begin_layout Subsection
29528 Printing the Nomenclature
29529 \begin_inset Index idx
29532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29533 Nomenclature ! Printing
29541 \begin_layout Standard
29542 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
29544 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29545 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29561 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
29562 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
29563 You can choose between these settings:
29566 \begin_layout Description
29567 Default a space of 1
29568 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29574 \begin_layout Description
29576 \begin_inset space ~
29580 \begin_inset space ~
29583 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
29586 \begin_layout Description
29587 Custom custom space
29590 \begin_layout Standard
29591 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
29592 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29596 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29600 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
29608 For example, in order to change the name to
29612 , add the following line to the preamble:
29615 \begin_layout Standard
29623 nomname}{List of Symbols}
29626 \begin_layout Subsection
29627 Nomenclature Program
29628 \begin_inset Index idx
29631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29632 Nomenclature ! Program
29638 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29640 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
29647 \begin_layout Standard
29653 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
29654 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
29656 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
29661 by adding options, see section
29662 \begin_inset space ~
29666 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29668 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
29673 The available options are listed and explained in
29674 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29676 key "nomencl,makeindex"
29683 \begin_layout Section
29685 \begin_inset Index idx
29688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29695 \begin_inset Index idx
29698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29699 Document ! Branches
29705 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29707 name "sec:Branches"
29714 \begin_layout Standard
29715 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
29716 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
29717 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
29718 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
29721 \begin_layout Standard
29722 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
29723 allows you to put text into branches.
29724 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
29725 To create a branch, either select the menu
29727 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29728 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
29731 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
29733 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29740 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
29741 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
29742 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
29743 and whether the name of the branch should
29744 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
29745 (see below for an example).
29746 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
29747 to the name of the other) and to add
29748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29756 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29760 \begin_inset space ~
29763 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29764 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29767 \begin_layout Standard
29768 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29769 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29771 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29774 where you can choose a branch.
29775 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29779 \begin_layout Standard
29780 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29781 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29784 \begin_layout Standard
29785 \begin_inset Branch Question
29788 \begin_layout Standard
29789 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29797 \begin_layout Standard
29798 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29801 \begin_layout Standard
29802 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29810 \begin_layout Standard
29817 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29818 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29821 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29822 Consider for example a file
29823 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29827 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29830 which has the above branches.
29832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29839 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29840 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29844 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29848 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29852 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29863 branch were inactive,
29864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29879 branch was active, likewise
29880 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29884 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29895 branch was active, and
29896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29899 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29903 if both branches were active.
29904 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29907 \begin_layout Standard
29908 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29914 \begin_layout Standard
29915 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29916 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
29917 definitions for each branch.
29918 For example you can define for the question branch
29922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29923 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29924 -syntax, see section
29925 \begin_inset space ~
29929 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29931 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
29943 \begin_layout Standard
29953 \begin_layout Standard
29963 \begin_layout Standard
29964 and for the answer branch
29967 \begin_layout Standard
29977 \begin_layout Standard
29987 \begin_layout Standard
29988 \begin_inset Branch Question
29991 \begin_layout Standard
29995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30023 \begin_layout Standard
30024 \begin_inset Branch Answer
30027 \begin_layout Standard
30031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30059 \begin_layout Standard
30060 Now it is possible to use the
30064 question{\SpecialChar ldots
30071 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
30074 commands to obtain conditional output.
30075 Here is an example formula where only the
30082 \begin_inset Formula
30084 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
30092 \begin_layout Standard
30093 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
30101 \begin_layout Standard
30102 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
30104 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30108 \begin_inset space \space{}
30111 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
30113 For this advanced usage, see the
30119 Flex insets and InsetLayout
30124 \begin_layout Section
30126 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30128 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
30133 \begin_inset Index idx
30136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30145 \begin_layout Standard
30148 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30149 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30152 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
30154 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30160 \begin_inset Index idx
30163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30165 -packages ! hyperref
30170 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
30171 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
30172 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
30173 part of the document.
30177 \begin_layout Standard
30178 The header information in the dialog tab
30182 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
30183 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
30184 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
30185 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
30189 \begin_inset space ~
30193 \begin_inset space ~
30198 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
30199 tries to extract the header information from your document title
30200 and author entries.
30204 \begin_inset space ~
30208 \begin_inset space ~
30212 \begin_inset space ~
30217 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
30220 \begin_layout Standard
30221 You can specify in the dialog tab
30225 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
30230 \begin_inset space ~
30234 \begin_inset space ~
30238 \begin_inset space ~
30243 option allows long links to be split;
30246 \begin_inset space ~
30250 \begin_inset space ~
30254 \begin_inset space ~
30262 \begin_inset space ~
30267 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
30270 \begin_inset space ~
30275 colors the different links.
30276 The default colors are:
30279 \begin_layout Labeling
30280 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30285 for hyperlinks and URLs
30288 \begin_layout Labeling
30289 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30297 \begin_layout Labeling
30298 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30306 \begin_layout Standard
30307 but you can change these in the field
30312 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
30315 \begin_layout Standard
30318 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
30321 \begin_layout Standard
30326 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
30327 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
30328 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
30331 \begin_layout Standard
30336 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
30337 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
30338 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
30348 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
30349 when opening the PDF.
30351 \begin_inset space ~
30354 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
30355 \begin_inset space ~
30358 1 will only display the sections.
30361 \begin_layout Standard
30362 PDF properties are also used in this document.
30363 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
30369 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
30370 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30379 \begin_layout Section
30381 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30383 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30385 name "sec:TeX-Code"
30392 \begin_layout Subsection
30395 \begin_inset Index idx
30398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30406 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30408 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
30415 \begin_layout Standard
30416 As \SpecialChar LyX
30417 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
30418 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
30419 commands and constructs,
30422 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
30423 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
30424 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
30425 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30426 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
30427 cannot support all packages and
30431 \begin_layout Standard
30432 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
30433 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
30434 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
30438 Code box is created by the menu
30440 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30442 \begin_inset space ~
30447 or by the toolbar button
30460 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
30468 \begin_layout Standard
30469 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
30471 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
30473 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
30477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30478 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
30483 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30490 , you can write the command part
30496 in a \SpecialChar TeX
30497 Code box before the word and the closing brace
30501 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
30502 Code box behind the word.
30503 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
30504 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
30508 \begin_layout Standard
30509 \begin_inset Graphics
30510 filename clipart/ERT.png
30518 \begin_layout Standard
30522 \begin_layout Standard
30523 This is a line with a
30527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30550 \begin_layout Standard
30551 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30559 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30560 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
30561 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
30562 know that the command is finished.
30570 \begin_layout Subsection
30571 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30573 \begin_inset Argument 1
30576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30577 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
30584 \begin_inset Index idx
30587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30595 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30597 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30604 \begin_layout Standard
30605 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
30606 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30607 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
30608 uses in the background.
30609 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
30610 is based on commands, you can
30611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30619 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
30620 any time if you know the right commands.
30621 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
30622 is the end of the day.
30623 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
30624 all caption labels bold.
30625 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
30627 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
30631 \begin_layout Standard
30632 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
30634 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30636 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30639 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30648 \begin_layout Standard
30649 As result you find that the package
30654 \begin_inset Index idx
30657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30659 -packages ! caption
30665 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
30667 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30670 \SpecialChar menuseparator
30674 \begin_inset space ~
30682 \begin_layout Standard
30687 usepackage[options]{package name}
30690 \begin_layout Standard
30691 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
30692 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
30693 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
30694 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
30697 \begin_layout Standard
30698 In your case the package name is
30703 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
30708 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
30709 So you add the command
30712 \begin_layout Standard
30717 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
30720 \begin_layout Standard
30721 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
30725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30726 For more commands provided by the
30730 package, have a look at its documentation,
30731 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30745 \begin_layout Standard
30746 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
30748 For example if you use a
30752 class, you don't need the package
30756 , you can instead write
30759 \begin_layout Standard
30764 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
30769 \begin_layout Standard
30770 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
30771 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
30772 documentation of the document class you want to use.
30779 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
30782 \begin_layout Standard
30783 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
30784 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
30786 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30787 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
30788 Code box as described in the previous
30792 \begin_layout Standard
30793 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30794 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30797 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30799 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
30806 \begin_layout Standard
30807 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
30813 \begin_layout Standard
30817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30827 \begin_inset Note Note
30830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30831 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30839 \begin_layout Left Header
30840 \begin_inset Argument 1
30843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30863 \begin_inset Note Note
30866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30867 defines the header line as described below
30875 \begin_layout Center Header
30876 \begin_inset Argument 1
30879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30888 \begin_layout Right Header
30889 \begin_inset Argument 1
30892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30913 \begin_layout Left Footer
30914 \begin_inset Argument 1
30917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30938 \begin_layout Center Footer
30939 \begin_inset Argument 1
30942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30954 \begin_inset Newline newline
30958 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30964 \begin_layout Right Footer
30965 \begin_inset Argument 1
30968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30990 \begin_layout Section
30991 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30992 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30994 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30999 \begin_inset Index idx
31002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31003 Document ! Header/Footer line
31009 \begin_inset Index idx
31012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31021 \begin_layout Standard
31022 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
31026 \begin_inset space ~
31037 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31043 \begin_inset space ~
31049 As a second step add in the menu
31051 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31052 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31056 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31061 Custom Header/Footerlines
31064 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31068 This module offers the following 6
31069 \begin_inset space ~
31075 \begin_layout Description
31077 \begin_inset space ~
31081 \begin_inset space ~
31085 \begin_inset space ~
31089 \begin_inset space ~
31093 \begin_inset space ~
31099 \begin_layout Description
31101 \begin_inset space ~
31105 \begin_inset space ~
31109 \begin_inset space ~
31113 \begin_inset space ~
31117 \begin_inset space ~
31123 \begin_layout Standard
31124 for the different positions in the header/footer.
31125 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
31128 \begin_layout Standard
31129 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
31130 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
31132 \begin_inset space ~
31136 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31138 reference "fig:Page-layout"
31142 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
31145 \begin_layout Standard
31146 \begin_inset Float figure
31152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31155 \begin_inset Tabular
31156 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
31157 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
31158 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31159 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31160 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31162 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
31174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31180 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31191 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31209 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31220 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
31223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31224 The normal text on the page goes here.
31225 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
31227 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
31228 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
31233 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31242 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31253 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31271 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31282 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
31294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31300 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31318 \begin_inset Caption Standard
31320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31321 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31323 name "fig:Page-layout"
31327 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
31340 \begin_layout Standard
31341 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31349 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
31353 \begin_inset space ~
31358 is set to “Default”.
31359 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
31368 \begin_layout Subsection
31372 \begin_layout Standard
31373 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
31374 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
31375 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
31376 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
31378 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
31380 Defining the footer line works similarly.
31383 \begin_layout Standard
31384 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
31385 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31389 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31391 \begin_inset space ~
31399 \begin_layout Description
31402 thepage prints the current page number
31405 \begin_layout Description
31408 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
31411 \begin_layout Description
31414 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
31417 \begin_layout Description
31420 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
31421 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
31424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31428 \begin_inset Quotes prd
31431 because it usually goes in a left header.
31434 \begin_layout Description
31437 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
31438 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
31440 It is normally used in the right header.
31443 \begin_layout Subsection
31444 Default header/footer
31447 \begin_layout Standard
31448 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
31449 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
31450 footer has the page number.
31451 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
31452 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
31453 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
31456 \begin_inset space ~
31464 \begin_layout Subsection
31468 \begin_layout Standard
31469 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
31470 Some pages are different.
31471 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
31472 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
31473 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
31474 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
31475 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
31478 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31479 Header and footer decoration line
31482 \begin_layout Standard
31483 By default, you get a 0.4
31484 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31487 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
31488 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
31500 in the following way:
31503 \begin_layout Standard
31510 headrulewidth}{thickness}
31513 \begin_layout Standard
31514 where thickness is a size in standard units like
31527 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
31528 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31534 \begin_layout Standard
31535 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31537 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
31538 \begin_inset space ~
31542 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31551 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31552 Several header/footer lines
31555 \begin_layout Standard
31556 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
31557 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
31558 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
31560 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31575 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31576 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31578 \begin_inset space ~
31586 \begin_layout Standard
31593 headheight}{height}
31596 \begin_layout Standard
31601 is a size in standard units (e.
31602 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31606 \begin_inset space \space{}
31614 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
31615 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
31616 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31617 logfile with the menu
31619 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31621 \begin_inset space ~
31629 \begin_inset space ~
31634 to see if you can find a warning about the package
31639 \begin_inset Index idx
31642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31644 -packages ! fancyhdr
31650 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
31651 for your header/footer.
31654 \begin_layout Subsection
31658 \begin_layout Standard
31659 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
31660 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
31661 This example consists of the following definition:
31664 \begin_layout Description
31666 \begin_inset space ~
31675 , empty optional argument
31678 \begin_layout Description
31680 \begin_inset space ~
31683 Header empty, empty optional argument
31686 \begin_layout Description
31688 \begin_inset space ~
31697 in the optional argument
31700 \begin_layout Description
31702 \begin_inset space ~
31711 in the optional argument
31714 \begin_layout Description
31716 \begin_inset space ~
31729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31733 \begin_inset Newline newline
31737 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31744 in the optional argument
31747 \begin_layout Description
31749 \begin_inset space ~
31758 , empty optional argument
31761 \begin_layout Description
31764 headrulewidth set to 2
31765 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31771 \begin_layout Standard
31772 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
31773 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
31779 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31788 \begin_layout Standard
31789 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
31795 \begin_layout Standard
31799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31803 pagestyle{headings}
31809 \begin_inset Note Note
31812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31813 switches back to page style with the default headings
31821 \begin_layout Section
31822 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31823 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31825 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31830 \begin_inset Index idx
31833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31840 \begin_inset Index idx
31843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31852 \begin_layout Standard
31854 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
31855 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31856 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31859 \begin_layout Subsection
31863 \begin_layout Standard
31864 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31870 \begin_inset Index idx
31873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31875 -packages ! preview-latex
31880 (on some systems named simply
31885 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
31887 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31893 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31895 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31903 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
31904 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31905 -package are automatically
31906 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
31910 \begin_layout Subsection
31914 \begin_layout Standard
31915 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
31916 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31918 activate the option
31921 \begin_inset space ~
31928 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31934 \begin_inset space ~
31938 \begin_inset space ~
31941 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
31948 \begin_inset space ~
31961 \begin_inset space ~
31966 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31969 \begin_layout Standard
31970 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31975 \begin_inset space ~
31983 \begin_inset space ~
31991 \begin_layout Standard
31992 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
31993 and when you finish
31997 \begin_layout Standard
31998 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32006 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
32007 generated by activating the option
32010 \begin_inset space ~
32016 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
32024 \begin_layout Subsection
32025 Selected document parts
32028 \begin_layout Standard
32029 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
32030 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
32031 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
32032 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32034 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
32036 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32040 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
32041 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
32042 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
32045 \begin_layout Standard
32046 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32053 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32065 is explained in section
32067 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
32072 \begin_inset space ~
32082 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
32083 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
32084 the final rotated boxes,
32085 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
32086 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
32088 Here is the result:
32091 \begin_layout Standard
32092 \begin_inset Preview
32094 \begin_layout Standard
32099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32103 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
32109 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
32119 height_special "totalheight"
32124 backgroundcolor "none"
32127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32152 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
32158 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
32165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32180 \begin_layout Standard
32181 Previewing works also for colors.
32182 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32201 is explained in section
32208 \begin_inset space ~
32221 \begin_layout Standard
32222 \begin_inset Preview
32224 \begin_layout Standard
32228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32247 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
32252 This is text within a colored, framed box.
32256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32271 \begin_layout Standard
32272 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
32278 \begin_layout Standard
32279 If \SpecialChar LyX
32280 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
32281 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
32282 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
32283 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32284 packages in your document preamble that are required by
32285 the \SpecialChar TeX
32287 If \SpecialChar LyX
32288 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
32289 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
32291 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
32292 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
32293 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
32296 \begin_layout Subsection
32301 \begin_layout Standard
32302 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32303 source of the whole document or parts of it.
32306 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
32308 \begin_inset space ~
32313 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32315 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
32317 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
32318 's main window, then only this selection
32319 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
32320 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
32321 the source view window.
32326 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
32327 ; but note that if you have
32328 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
32330 not just the one which is open at the time.
32333 \begin_layout Section
32334 Advanced Find and Replace
32335 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32337 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
32342 \begin_inset Index idx
32345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32352 \begin_inset Index idx
32355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32364 \begin_layout Subsection
32368 \begin_layout Standard
32369 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
32370 allows for searching of complex,
32371 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
32373 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
32374 The key-features are:
32377 \begin_layout Itemize
32378 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
32379 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
32380 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
32384 \begin_layout Itemize
32385 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
32386 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
32387 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
32388 a section heading will only be found within section headings
32391 \begin_layout Itemize
32392 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
32393 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
32394 outside of mathematics environments
32397 \begin_layout Itemize
32398 Search may be widened to a specific
32403 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32407 \begin_inset space ~
32410 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
32411 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
32418 \begin_layout Itemize
32419 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
32420 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
32421 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32425 \begin_inset space ~
32428 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
32431 \begin_layout Subsection
32435 \begin_layout Standard
32436 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
32438 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32451 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
32454 ) or the toolbar button
32457 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
32463 Advanced Find and Replace
32468 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32472 \begin_layout Standard
32478 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
32482 \begin_inset space ~
32487 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
32490 arg "paragraph-break"
32494 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
32495 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
32499 arg "paragraph-break"
32502 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
32506 searches backwards.
32509 \begin_layout Standard
32513 \begin_inset space ~
32518 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
32527 \begin_inset space ~
32532 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
32535 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32536 Searching for mathematics
32539 \begin_layout Standard
32540 Mathematical formulas, such as
32541 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
32544 or something more complex like
32545 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
32548 , may be searched for by typing them in the
32553 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
32554 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
32555 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
32556 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
32562 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32566 \begin_layout Standard
32567 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
32568 This is done by switching to the
32572 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
32577 This way, entering in the
32584 \begin_layout Itemize
32585 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
32586 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
32589 \begin_layout Itemize
32590 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
32591 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
32594 \begin_layout Itemize
32595 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
32596 of it only within section headings.
32597 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
32598 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
32602 \begin_layout Itemize
32603 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
32604 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
32607 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32611 \begin_layout Standard
32612 The entries made in the
32616 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
32619 \begin_inset space ~
32625 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
32629 button or alternatively press
32632 arg "paragraph-break"
32639 while the cursor is in the
32642 \begin_inset space ~
32650 \begin_layout Standard
32651 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
32653 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
32657 \begin_layout Itemize
32658 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
32659 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
32660 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32667 with its typewriter version
32668 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32676 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32682 \begin_layout Itemize
32683 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
32685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32689 \begin_inset Formula $R$
32693 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32701 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
32705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32708 (you may want to enable the
32711 \begin_inset space ~
32719 \begin_inset space ~
32724 options and disable the
32732 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
32733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32740 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
32741 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
32745 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
32748 , or occurrences of
32749 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
32753 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
32759 \begin_layout Subsection
32763 \begin_layout Standard
32764 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
32768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32769 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
32771 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32773 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
32782 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
32788 This is done with the context menu
32790 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32791 Insert Regular Expression
32793 while the cursor is in the
32798 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
32799 expression matching rules
32803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32804 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
32807 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32811 \begin_inset space ~
32814 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
32815 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
32821 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
32822 same text in the document.
32823 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
32824 Examples of using such a feature may be:
32827 \begin_layout Enumerate
32828 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
32833 editor the fraction
32834 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
32838 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32841 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
32842 fractions with the given denominator.
32845 \begin_layout Enumerate
32846 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
32858 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32863 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32864 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32865 Also, by inserting a
32866 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32869 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32870 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32873 \begin_layout Standard
32874 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32875 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32876 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32879 , and referring back to them through
32880 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32884 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32888 For example, try searching with the regexp
32889 \begin_inset Newline newline
32892 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32895 \begin_inset Newline newline
32898 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32901 \begin_layout Standard
32902 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32905 \begin_layout Standard
32906 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32914 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
32915 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
32916 sub-expressions is absolute.
32918 \begin_inset space ~
32922 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32925 always refers to the first occurrence of
32926 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32929 in all entered regexps.
32937 \begin_layout Section
32939 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32941 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32946 \begin_inset Index idx
32949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32958 \begin_layout Standard
32960 has a built-in spell checker.
32963 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32970 key or the toolbar button
32973 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
32976 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32977 beginning of the currently selected text.
32978 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32979 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32980 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32981 scrolled so that it is visible.
32982 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
32983 n, if any could be found.
32984 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
32988 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
32989 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
32992 \begin_layout Standard
32993 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
32996 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33000 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
33001 a different one at the top of the dialog.
33003 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
33004 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
33007 \begin_inset space ~
33015 arg "dialog-show character"
33018 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
33020 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
33023 \begin_layout Standard
33024 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
33025 can be downloaded from here:
33026 \begin_inset Newline newline
33030 \begin_inset Flex URL
33033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33035 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
33041 \begin_inset Newline newline
33045 \begin_inset space ~
33048 files for each language.
33049 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
33050 \begin_inset space ~
33053 files into \SpecialChar LyX
33054 's installation subfolder
33062 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
33064 \begin_inset Newline newline
33067 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
33068 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
33069 but in most cases these are
33085 is the language code.
33088 \begin_layout Subsection
33092 \begin_layout Standard
33095 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33096 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33098 \begin_inset space ~
33101 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33104 you can set the following things:
33107 \begin_layout Description
33109 \begin_inset space ~
33112 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
33113 should use for spell checking.
33114 Depending on your platform,
33128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33129 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
33130 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
33145 \begin_inset space ~
33148 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
33151 \begin_layout Description
33153 \begin_inset space ~
33156 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
33157 will always use the given language
33158 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
33161 \begin_layout Description
33163 \begin_inset space ~
33166 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
33168 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33172 \begin_inset space \space{}
33176 This should normally not be needed.
33179 \begin_layout Description
33181 \begin_inset space ~
33185 \begin_inset space ~
33188 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
33190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33194 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33200 \begin_layout Description
33202 \begin_inset space ~
33205 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
33206 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
33207 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
33208 appear in a context menu.
33209 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
33213 \begin_layout Description
33215 \begin_inset space ~
33219 \begin_inset space ~
33223 \begin_inset space ~
33226 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
33230 \begin_layout Section
33232 \begin_inset Index idx
33235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33242 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33244 name "sec:Thesaurus"
33251 \begin_layout Standard
33253 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
33254 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
33263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33264 \begin_inset CommandInset href
33266 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
33275 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
33277 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
33278 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
33279 which are available for many languages.
33282 \begin_layout Standard
33283 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
33284 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
33288 \begin_layout Subsection
33289 Setting up the thesaurus
33292 \begin_layout Standard
33301 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
33305 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
33310 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
33312 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33316 \begin_inset space ~
33324 For instance, the US English files are named:
33327 \begin_layout Itemize
33331 \begin_layout Itemize
33335 \begin_layout Standard
33344 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
33345 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
33348 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33349 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33350 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33352 \begin_inset space ~
33357 ) to the path where they are installed.
33361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33362 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
33363 ies, typical locations are
33369 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
33373 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
33377 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
33380 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
33386 LibreOffice-<Version>
33393 On the Mac, the default location is
33395 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
33396 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33397 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
33398 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
33399 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33400 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33408 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
33409 during the \SpecialChar LyX
33410 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
33414 \begin_layout Standard
33415 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
33416 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
33420 \begin_layout Itemize
33421 \begin_inset Flex URL
33424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33426 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
33434 \begin_layout Standard
33435 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
33436 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
33438 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33439 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33440 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33442 \begin_inset space ~
33447 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
33449 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
33450 and point \SpecialChar LyX
33454 \begin_layout Standard
33455 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
33457 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33460 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
33466 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
33469 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
33470 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
33472 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33478 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33479 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33480 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33482 \begin_inset space ~
33487 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
33490 \begin_layout Subsection
33491 Using the thesaurus
33494 \begin_layout Standard
33495 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
33497 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33500 or the toolbar button
33503 arg "thesaurus-entry"
33506 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
33508 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
33510 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
33511 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
33512 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
33521 ), related terms (such as
33524 \begin_inset space ~
33533 ), compounds (such as
33536 \begin_inset space ~
33545 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
33554 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
33557 \begin_layout Standard
33558 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
33559 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
33563 \begin_layout Standard
33564 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
33565 the dictionary, such as the above
33569 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
33570 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33574 \begin_inset space \space{}
33577 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
33578 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
33579 For example, looking up the word form
33583 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
33588 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
33589 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33593 \begin_inset space \space{}
33604 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
33605 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
33606 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
33609 \begin_layout Section
33611 \begin_inset Index idx
33614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33621 \begin_inset Index idx
33624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33625 Document ! Change Tracking
33631 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33633 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
33640 \begin_layout Standard
33641 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
33642 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
33643 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
33644 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
33646 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33648 \begin_inset space ~
33651 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33653 \begin_inset space ~
33661 \begin_layout Standard
33662 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
33676 The color depends on the author that made the change.
33677 You can change the color in
33679 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33680 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33682 \begin_inset space ~
33686 \begin_inset space ~
33691 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33697 \begin_inset Index idx
33700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33701 Color ! Change tracking
33706 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
33707 's status bar when the
33708 cursor is in changed text.
33709 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
33712 arg "changes-merge"
33718 \begin_layout Standard
33719 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
33721 \begin_inset Index idx
33724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33733 \begin_layout Standard
33734 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33740 \begin_layout Standard
33741 \begin_inset Graphics
33742 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
33750 \begin_layout Standard
33751 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33757 \begin_layout Standard
33758 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
33761 \begin_layout Standard
33762 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33768 \begin_layout Standard
33769 \begin_inset Tabular
33770 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
33771 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
33772 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33773 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33774 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33783 arg "changes-track"
33791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33797 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33799 \begin_inset space ~
33802 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33804 \begin_inset space ~
33813 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33822 arg "changes-output"
33830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33836 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33838 \begin_inset space ~
33841 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33843 \begin_inset space ~
33847 \begin_inset space ~
33851 \begin_inset space ~
33860 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33881 Jumps to the next change
33887 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33896 arg "change-accept"
33904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33910 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33912 \begin_inset space ~
33915 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33917 \begin_inset space ~
33926 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33935 arg "change-reject"
33943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33949 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33951 \begin_inset space ~
33954 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33956 \begin_inset space ~
33965 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33974 arg "changes-merge"
33982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33988 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33990 \begin_inset space ~
33993 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33995 \begin_inset space ~
34004 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34013 arg "all-changes-accept"
34021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34027 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34029 \begin_inset space ~
34032 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34034 \begin_inset space ~
34038 \begin_inset space ~
34047 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34056 arg "all-changes-reject"
34064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34070 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34072 \begin_inset space ~
34075 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34077 \begin_inset space ~
34081 \begin_inset space ~
34090 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34113 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34114 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
34116 \begin_inset space ~
34125 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34148 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
34150 \begin_inset space ~
34166 \begin_layout Standard
34167 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
34173 \begin_layout Standard
34174 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
34194 \begin_layout Standard
34195 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
34196 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
34197 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
34198 the next change after the current cursor position.
34199 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
34200 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
34201 step to the next change.
34202 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
34205 \begin_layout Standard
34206 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
34207 to describe a change.
34210 \begin_layout Standard
34211 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34217 \begin_inset Index idx
34220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34222 -packages ! dvipost
34228 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34230 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34236 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34240 \begin_layout Section
34241 Comparison of Documents
34242 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34244 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
34249 \begin_inset Index idx
34252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34253 Comparison of documents
34261 \begin_layout Standard
34262 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
34265 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34269 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
34270 file with change tracking enabled showing the
34272 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
34274 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
34278 \begin_inset space ~
34282 \begin_inset space ~
34286 \begin_inset space ~
34295 \begin_inset space ~
34299 \begin_inset space ~
34303 \begin_inset space ~
34307 \begin_inset space ~
34311 \begin_inset space ~
34315 \begin_inset space ~
34320 enables the change tracking option
34323 \begin_inset space ~
34327 \begin_inset space ~
34331 \begin_inset space ~
34336 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
34339 \begin_layout Section
34340 International Support
34341 \begin_inset Index idx
34344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34345 International support
34353 \begin_layout Standard
34354 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
34355 with any language you want.
34356 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
34357 up \SpecialChar LyX
34359 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34361 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
34368 \begin_layout Standard
34369 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
34370 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
34371 \begin_inset space ~
34375 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34377 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
34384 \begin_layout Subsection
34386 \begin_inset Index idx
34389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34396 \begin_inset Index idx
34399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34400 Document ! Settings
34406 \begin_inset Index idx
34409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34410 Document ! Language
34418 \begin_layout Standard
34421 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34422 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34425 dialog lets you set
34427 the language, the quote style and character encoding
34432 \begin_layout Standard
34437 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
34442 \begin_inset space ~
34447 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
34448 For details about the different encoding options see section
34449 \begin_inset space ~
34453 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34455 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
34462 \begin_layout Subsection
34463 Keyboard mapping configuration
34464 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34466 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
34473 \begin_layout Standard
34474 If you have for example a U.
34475 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34478 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
34479 can use an alternate keymap.
34480 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
34485 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34486 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34487 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
34490 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
34491 \begin_inset space ~
34495 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34497 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
34502 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
34503 which one you want to use.
34506 \begin_layout Standard
34507 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
34508 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
34509 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
34510 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34513 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
34514 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
34515 one to support the characters you want.
34516 This and many other customizations are explained in the
34523 \begin_layout Chapter
34526 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34528 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
34535 \begin_layout Standard
34536 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
34537 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
34538 topic inside the user's guide.
34541 \begin_layout Section
34543 \begin_inset Index idx
34546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34555 \begin_layout Standard
34560 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
34563 \begin_layout Subsection
34567 \begin_layout Standard
34568 Creates a new document.
34571 \begin_layout Subsection
34575 \begin_layout Standard
34576 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
34577 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
34578 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
34581 \begin_layout Subsection
34585 \begin_layout Standard
34589 \begin_layout Subsection
34593 \begin_layout Standard
34594 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
34595 Click there on a file to open it.
34598 \begin_layout Subsection
34602 \begin_layout Standard
34603 Closes the current document.
34606 \begin_layout Subsection
34610 \begin_layout Standard
34611 Closes all opened documents.
34614 \begin_layout Subsection
34618 \begin_layout Standard
34619 Saves the actual document.
34622 \begin_layout Subsection
34626 \begin_layout Standard
34627 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
34630 \begin_layout Subsection
34634 \begin_layout Standard
34635 Saves all opened documents.
34638 \begin_layout Subsection
34642 \begin_layout Standard
34643 Reloads the actual document from disk.
34646 \begin_layout Subsection
34650 \begin_layout Standard
34651 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
34652 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
34653 It is described in the section
34655 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
34660 Additional Features
34665 \begin_layout Subsection
34669 \begin_layout Standard
34670 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
34671 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
34673 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
34674 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
34678 \begin_layout Standard
34679 When using the menu entry
34682 \begin_inset space ~
34687 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
34691 \begin_inset space ~
34695 \begin_inset space ~
34699 \begin_inset space ~
34704 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
34705 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
34708 \begin_layout Subsection
34710 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34712 name "subsec:Export"
34719 \begin_layout Standard
34720 You can export your document to various file formats.
34721 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
34723 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
34724 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
34725 during its configuration.
34728 \begin_layout Standard
34729 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
34731 \begin_inset space ~
34735 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34737 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
34744 \begin_layout Description
34750 \begin_inset space ~
34753 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
34755 \begin_inset space ~
34758 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
34759 \begin_inset Newline newline
34762 Since \SpecialChar LyX
34763 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
34767 \begin_layout Description
34768 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
34774 \begin_layout Description
34776 \begin_inset space ~
34779 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
34785 \begin_layout Description
34786 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
34787 's native DVI-format.
34788 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
34789 files paths or file names in your document.
34791 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
34798 \begin_layout Description
34799 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
34800 in files paths or file names
34803 \begin_layout Description
34805 \begin_inset space ~
34812 ) DVI-format using the program
34814 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34817 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
34821 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34829 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
34837 \begin_layout Description
34839 \begin_inset space ~
34842 (cropped) the same as
34846 but with cropped page margins.
34849 \begin_layout Description
34851 \begin_inset space ~
34854 Dot text file with code in the programming language
34858 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
34863 \begin_layout Description
34867 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34875 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
34883 \begin_layout Description
34885 \begin_inset space ~
34889 \begin_inset space ~
34892 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
34896 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
34904 \begin_layout Description
34908 \begin_inset space ~
34917 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34918 source that is compilable with the program
34920 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34924 \begin_layout Description
34928 \begin_inset space ~
34933 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34934 source, additionally all images used in the document
34935 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
34939 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
34942 \begin_layout Description
34946 \begin_inset space ~
34951 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34952 source code, additionally all images used in the document
34953 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
34961 \begin_layout Description
34965 \begin_inset space ~
34974 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34975 source that is compilable with the program
34981 \begin_layout Description
34983 \begin_inset space ~
34987 \begin_inset space ~
34994 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34995 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
35001 \begin_layout Description
35003 \begin_inset space ~
35006 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
35007 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
35009 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35013 \begin_inset space \space{}
35018 \begin_inset space ~
35022 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35026 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35030 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35034 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35037 represent the version number)
35040 \begin_layout Description
35042 \begin_inset space ~
35046 \begin_inset space ~
35049 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
35050 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
35051 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35055 \begin_layout Description
35056 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
35057 's internal XHTML engine
35060 \begin_layout Description
35062 \begin_inset space ~
35066 \begin_inset space ~
35070 \begin_inset space ~
35074 \begin_inset space ~
35077 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
35082 For the conversion the program
35091 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
35094 \begin_layout Description
35095 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
35100 \begin_layout Description
35102 \begin_inset space ~
35105 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
35107 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
35110 For the conversion the program
35119 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
35122 \begin_layout Description
35124 \begin_inset space ~
35127 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
35128 For the conversion the program
35137 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
35140 \begin_layout Description
35142 \begin_inset space ~
35145 (cropped) the same as
35148 \begin_inset space ~
35153 but with cropped page margins
35156 \begin_layout Description
35160 \begin_inset space ~
35165 PDF-format using the program
35169 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
35172 \begin_layout Description
35176 \begin_inset space ~
35180 \begin_inset space ~
35188 \begin_inset space ~
35193 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
35194 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35198 \begin_inset space \space{}
35201 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
35205 \begin_layout Description
35209 \begin_inset space ~
35214 PDF-format using the program
35216 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
35219 , produces PDF-files directly
35222 \begin_layout Description
35226 \begin_inset space ~
35231 PDF-format using the program
35235 , produces PDF-files directly
35238 \begin_layout Description
35242 \begin_inset space ~
35247 PDF-format using the program
35251 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
35254 \begin_layout Description
35258 \begin_inset space ~
35263 PDF-format using the program
35268 , produces PDF-files directly
35271 \begin_layout Description
35275 \begin_inset space ~
35283 \begin_layout Description
35287 \begin_inset space ~
35291 \begin_inset space ~
35296 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
35297 and then exported as text using the program
35302 \begin_layout Description
35307 PostScript format using the program
35315 options see section
35316 \begin_inset space ~
35320 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35322 reference "subsec:General-output"
35329 \begin_layout Description
35330 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35331 source and also code in the statistical programming
35345 it is possible to use
35349 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
35353 \begin_layout Standard
35354 If one of the menu entries
35361 \begin_inset space ~
35370 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35372 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
35374 \begin_inset space ~
35378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35380 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
35385 \begin_inset Index idx
35388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35389 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
35398 \begin_layout Subsection
35402 \begin_layout Standard
35403 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
35404 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
35407 \begin_inset space ~
35411 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35413 reference "sec:Paths"
35418 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
35427 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
35428 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
35429 's preferences as described in section
35430 \begin_inset space ~
35434 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35436 reference "subsec:Converters"
35443 \begin_layout Subsection
35444 New and Close Window
35447 \begin_layout Standard
35448 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
35452 \begin_layout Subsection
35456 \begin_layout Standard
35457 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
35460 \begin_layout Section
35462 \begin_inset Index idx
35465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35474 \begin_layout Subsection
35478 \begin_layout Standard
35479 Described in section
35480 \begin_inset space ~
35484 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35486 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
35493 \begin_layout Subsection
35494 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
35497 \begin_layout Standard
35498 Described in section
35499 \begin_inset space ~
35503 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35505 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35512 \begin_layout Subsection
35516 \begin_layout Standard
35517 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
35518 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
35521 \begin_layout Subsection
35525 \begin_layout Standard
35526 Selects the whole document.
35529 \begin_layout Subsection
35530 Find & Replace (Quick)
35533 \begin_layout Standard
35534 Described in section
35535 \begin_inset space ~
35539 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35541 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35548 \begin_layout Subsection
35549 Find & Replace (Advanced)
35552 \begin_layout Standard
35553 Described in section
35554 \begin_inset space ~
35558 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35560 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35567 \begin_layout Subsection
35568 Move Paragraph Up/Down
35571 \begin_layout Standard
35572 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
35576 \begin_layout Subsection
35580 \begin_layout Standard
35581 Described in section
35582 \begin_inset space ~
35586 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35588 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
35595 \begin_layout Subsection
35597 \begin_inset Index idx
35600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35601 Paragraph ! Settings
35609 \begin_layout Standard
35610 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
35611 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
35615 \begin_layout Standard
35616 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
35617 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
35623 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35624 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35626 \begin_inset space ~
35634 \begin_layout Subsection
35635 Table and Rows & Columns
35638 \begin_layout Standard
35639 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
35640 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
35641 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
35644 \begin_layout Subsection
35648 \begin_layout Standard
35649 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
35650 It will dissolve this inset.
35651 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
35655 \begin_layout Subsection
35659 \begin_layout Standard
35660 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
35661 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
35664 \begin_layout Subsection
35665 Increase/Decrease List Depth
35668 \begin_layout Standard
35669 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
35671 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
35672 \begin_inset space ~
35676 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35678 reference "sec:Nesting"
35683 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35685 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
35692 \begin_layout Subsection
35695 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
35698 \begin_layout Standard
35699 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
35700 nts of the same type.
35702 \begin_inset space ~
35706 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35708 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
35712 for an explanation.
35715 \begin_layout Section
35717 \begin_inset Index idx
35720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35729 \begin_layout Standard
35730 At the bottom of the
35734 menu the opened documents are listed.
35737 \begin_layout Subsection
35738 Open/Close all Insets
35741 \begin_layout Standard
35742 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
35745 \begin_layout Subsection
35746 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
35749 \begin_layout Standard
35750 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
35753 \begin_layout Standard
35754 Math macros are described in the
35761 \begin_layout Subsection
35765 \begin_layout Standard
35766 Shows the outline window as described in sections
35767 \begin_inset space ~
35771 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35773 reference "sec:Navigating"
35778 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35780 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
35787 \begin_layout Subsection
35791 \begin_layout Standard
35792 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
35794 \begin_inset space ~
35798 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35800 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35807 \begin_layout Subsection
35811 \begin_layout Standard
35812 Opens a window showing console messages.
35813 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
35815 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35818 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
35819 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
35820 is processing the document.
35823 \begin_layout Subsection
35825 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35827 name "subsec:Toolbars"
35832 \begin_inset Index idx
35835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35844 \begin_layout Standard
35845 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
35846 All toolbars and the
35849 \begin_inset space ~
35854 can be turned on and off.
35859 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
35871 \begin_inset space ~
35883 \begin_inset space ~
35888 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
35892 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
35899 \begin_layout Standard
35904 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
35908 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
35909 or when a certain feature is enabled.
35910 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
35911 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
35912 is inside a formula or table respectively.
35915 \begin_layout Standard
35917 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
35918 \begin_inset space ~
35922 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35924 reference "sec:Toolbars"
35931 \begin_layout Subsection
35935 \begin_layout Standard
35939 \begin_inset space ~
35943 \begin_inset space ~
35947 \begin_inset space ~
35951 \begin_inset space ~
35955 \begin_inset space ~
35959 \begin_inset space ~
35964 will split \SpecialChar LyX
35965 's main window vertically while
35968 \begin_inset space ~
35972 \begin_inset space ~
35976 \begin_inset space ~
35980 \begin_inset space ~
35984 \begin_inset space ~
35988 \begin_inset space ~
35993 will split it horizontally.
35994 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
35995 to view the same document, but at different positions.
35996 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
35997 three or more documents at the same time.
35998 To close a split view, use the menu
36001 \begin_inset space ~
36005 \begin_inset space ~
36013 \begin_layout Subsection
36017 \begin_layout Standard
36018 Closes a split view.
36021 \begin_layout Subsection
36025 \begin_layout Standard
36026 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
36027 so that you will see nothing but your text.
36028 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
36029 's main window fullscreen.
36030 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
36031 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
36034 \begin_layout Section
36036 \begin_inset Index idx
36039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36048 \begin_layout Subsection
36052 \begin_layout Standard
36053 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
36054 \begin_inset space ~
36058 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36060 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
36071 \begin_layout Subsection
36073 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36075 name "subsec:Special-Character"
36082 \begin_layout Standard
36083 Here you can insert the following characters:
36086 \begin_layout Description
36091 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
36094 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
36095 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36096 -packages you have installed.
36097 You can get a complete display by checking
36100 \begin_inset space ~
36106 \begin_inset Newline newline
36110 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36118 Not all characters will be visible in the
36122 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
36123 dialog (see section
36124 \begin_inset space ~
36128 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36130 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
36134 ) can display every character.
36142 \begin_layout Description
36143 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
36147 \begin_layout Description
36149 \begin_inset space ~
36153 \begin_inset space ~
36156 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
36157 \begin_inset space ~
36161 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36163 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
36170 \begin_layout Description
36172 \begin_inset space ~
36175 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
36178 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36179 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36185 \begin_layout Description
36187 \begin_inset space ~
36190 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
36193 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36194 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36200 \begin_layout Description
36202 \begin_inset space ~
36205 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
36209 \begin_layout Description
36211 \begin_inset space ~
36214 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
36218 \begin_layout Description
36220 \begin_inset space ~
36223 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
36229 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36235 \begin_layout Description
36237 \begin_inset space ~
36240 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
36244 \begin_layout Description
36246 \begin_inset space ~
36250 \begin_inset Index idx
36253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36260 \begin_inset Index idx
36263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36264 Language ! Phonetic symbols
36269 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
36270 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
36272 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36278 \begin_inset Index idx
36281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36289 \begin_inset Newline newline
36292 More information about this feature can be found in the
36298 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
36304 \begin_layout Description
36305 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
36307 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
36308 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
36312 \begin_layout Subsection
36316 \begin_layout Standard
36317 Opens a submenu with the following options:
36320 \begin_layout Description
36321 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
36322 \begin_inset script superscript
36324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36333 \begin_layout Description
36334 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
36335 \begin_inset script subscript
36337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36346 \begin_layout Description
36348 \begin_inset space ~
36351 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
36352 \begin_inset space ~
36356 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36358 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
36365 \begin_layout Description
36367 \begin_inset space ~
36370 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
36371 \begin_inset space ~
36375 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36377 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
36384 \begin_layout Description
36386 \begin_inset space ~
36389 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
36390 \begin_inset space ~
36394 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36396 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
36403 \begin_layout Description
36405 \begin_inset space ~
36408 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
36410 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36414 \begin_inset space \space{}
36417 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
36418 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
36424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36427 To insert a fraction use the command
36432 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36436 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
36442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36445 The visible space is hereby the character before the
36452 \begin_layout Description
36454 \begin_inset space ~
36457 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
36458 \begin_inset space ~
36462 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36464 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
36471 \begin_layout Description
36473 \begin_inset space ~
36476 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
36477 \begin_inset space ~
36481 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36483 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
36490 \begin_layout Description
36492 \begin_inset space ~
36495 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
36496 \begin_inset space ~
36500 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36502 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
36509 \begin_layout Description
36510 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
36511 \begin_inset space ~
36515 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36517 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
36524 \begin_layout Description
36526 \begin_inset space ~
36529 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
36530 \begin_inset space ~
36534 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36536 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
36543 \begin_layout Description
36545 \begin_inset space ~
36548 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
36549 \begin_inset space ~
36553 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36555 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
36562 \begin_layout Description
36564 \begin_inset space ~
36568 \begin_inset space ~
36571 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
36572 \begin_inset space ~
36576 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36578 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36585 \begin_layout Description
36587 \begin_inset space ~
36590 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
36591 as described in section
36592 \begin_inset space ~
36596 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36598 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36605 \begin_layout Description
36607 \begin_inset space ~
36610 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
36611 \begin_inset space ~
36615 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36617 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36624 \begin_layout Description
36626 \begin_inset space ~
36629 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
36630 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
36632 \begin_inset space ~
36636 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36638 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36645 \begin_layout Description
36647 \begin_inset space ~
36650 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
36651 \begin_inset space ~
36655 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36657 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36664 \begin_layout Description
36666 \begin_inset space ~
36670 \begin_inset space ~
36673 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
36674 \begin_inset space ~
36678 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36680 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36687 \begin_layout Subsection
36691 \begin_layout Standard
36692 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
36696 \begin_inset space ~
36717 are described in section
36718 \begin_inset space ~
36722 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36724 reference "sec:toc"
36733 is described in section
36734 \begin_inset space ~
36738 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36740 reference "sec:Index"
36748 is described in section
36749 \begin_inset space ~
36753 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36755 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36761 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36764 is described in section
36765 \begin_inset space ~
36769 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36771 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
36778 \begin_layout Subsection
36782 \begin_layout Standard
36783 To insert floats, as described in section
36784 \begin_inset space ~
36788 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36790 reference "sec:Floats"
36794 and in detail the chapter
36801 \begin_inset space ~
36809 \begin_layout Subsection
36813 \begin_layout Standard
36814 To insert notes, described in section
36815 \begin_inset space ~
36819 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36821 reference "sec:Notes"
36828 \begin_layout Subsection
36832 \begin_layout Standard
36833 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
36835 Branches are described in section
36836 \begin_inset space ~
36840 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36842 reference "sec:Branches"
36849 \begin_layout Subsection
36853 \begin_layout Standard
36854 Inserts document class-specific insets.
36855 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
36857 An example is the document class
36858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36865 with three custom insets.
36868 Flex insets and InsetLayout
36872 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
36878 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
36881 \begin_layout Subsection
36883 \begin_inset Index idx
36886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36895 \begin_layout Standard
36896 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
36898 For more information see chapter
36900 External Document Parts
36903 \begin_inset space ~
36909 \begin_layout Subsection
36911 \begin_inset Index idx
36914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36923 \begin_layout Standard
36924 Inserts a box in a certain style.
36925 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
36932 \begin_inset space ~
36940 \begin_layout Subsection
36944 \begin_layout Standard
36949 dialog as described in section
36950 \begin_inset space ~
36954 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36956 reference "sec:Bibliography"
36963 \begin_layout Subsection
36967 \begin_layout Standard
36972 as described in section
36973 \begin_inset space ~
36977 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36979 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36986 \begin_layout Subsection
36990 \begin_layout Standard
36995 as described in section
36996 \begin_inset space ~
37000 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37002 reference "sec:Cross-References"
37009 \begin_layout Subsection
37011 \begin_inset Index idx
37014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37021 \begin_inset Index idx
37024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37025 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
37033 \begin_layout Standard
37034 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
37035 Floats are described in section
37036 \begin_inset space ~
37040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37042 reference "sec:Floats"
37046 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
37048 Multi-page Captions
37053 \begin_inset space ~
37061 \begin_layout Subsection
37065 \begin_layout Standard
37066 Inserts an index entry as described in section
37067 \begin_inset space ~
37071 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37073 reference "sec:Index"
37080 \begin_layout Subsection
37084 \begin_layout Standard
37085 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
37086 \begin_inset space ~
37090 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37092 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
37099 \begin_layout Subsection
37103 \begin_layout Standard
37104 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
37105 Tables are described in section
37106 \begin_inset space ~
37110 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37112 reference "sec:Tables"
37116 and in detail in the chapter
37123 \begin_inset space ~
37131 \begin_layout Subsection
37135 \begin_layout Standard
37141 Graphics are described in section
37142 \begin_inset space ~
37146 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37148 reference "sec:Graphics"
37155 \begin_layout Subsection
37159 \begin_layout Standard
37160 Inserts a URL as described in section
37161 \begin_inset space ~
37165 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37167 reference "subsec:URLs"
37174 \begin_layout Subsection
37178 \begin_layout Standard
37179 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
37180 \begin_inset space ~
37184 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37186 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
37193 \begin_layout Subsection
37197 \begin_layout Standard
37198 Inserts a footnote as described in section
37199 \begin_inset space ~
37203 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37205 reference "sec:Footnotes"
37212 \begin_layout Subsection
37216 \begin_layout Standard
37217 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
37218 \begin_inset space ~
37222 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37224 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
37231 \begin_layout Subsection
37235 \begin_layout Standard
37236 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
37237 title or caption of a float.
37238 Inserts a short title as described in section
37239 \begin_inset space ~
37243 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37245 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
37252 \begin_layout Subsection
37257 \begin_layout Standard
37258 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
37259 Code box as described in section
37260 \begin_inset space ~
37264 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37266 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
37273 \begin_layout Subsection
37275 \begin_inset Index idx
37278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37287 \begin_layout Standard
37288 Inserts a program listings box.
37289 Program listings are explained in the chapter
37291 Program Code Listings
37296 \begin_inset space ~
37304 \begin_layout Subsection
37308 \begin_layout Standard
37309 Inserts the actual date.
37310 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
37314 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
37322 \begin_inset space ~
37330 \begin_layout Subsection
37334 \begin_layout Standard
37335 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
37336 \begin_inset space ~
37340 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37342 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37349 \begin_layout Section
37351 \begin_inset Index idx
37354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37363 \begin_layout Standard
37364 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
37365 \begin_inset space ~
37368 of the current document.
37369 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
37372 \begin_layout Subsection
37376 \begin_layout Standard
37377 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
37378 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
37379 to jump, for example, between section
37380 \begin_inset space ~
37384 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
37385 \begin_inset space ~
37388 2.5 and use the submenu
37391 \begin_inset space ~
37395 \begin_inset space ~
37402 \begin_inset space ~
37408 \begin_inset space ~
37412 \begin_inset space ~
37418 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
37422 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
37428 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
37431 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
37434 \begin_layout Standard
37435 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
37439 \begin_inset space ~
37444 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
37447 \begin_inset space ~
37452 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
37455 \begin_layout Subsection
37456 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
37459 \begin_layout Standard
37460 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
37464 \begin_layout Subsection
37468 \begin_layout Standard
37469 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
37470 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
37471 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
37475 \begin_inset space ~
37479 \begin_inset space ~
37487 \begin_layout Subsection
37491 \begin_layout Standard
37492 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
37495 The \SpecialChar LyX
37496 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
37498 \begin_inset space ~
37506 \begin_inset space ~
37511 manual for a detailed description.
37514 \begin_layout Section
37516 \begin_inset Index idx
37519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37528 \begin_layout Subsection
37532 \begin_layout Standard
37533 Change Tracking is described in section
37534 \begin_inset space ~
37538 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37540 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
37547 \begin_layout Subsection
37555 \begin_layout Standard
37556 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
37557 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
37558 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37560 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
37561 to the clipboard or update the view.
37562 \begin_inset Newline newline
37565 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
37569 \begin_layout Standard
37572 Open Containing Directory
37574 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
37575 's temporary folder for the document.
37576 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
37577 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
37578 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
37579 For example some journals require to send the
37583 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37587 \begin_layout Subsection
37588 Start Appendix Here
37591 \begin_layout Standard
37592 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
37593 as described in section
37594 \begin_inset space ~
37598 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37600 reference "sec:Appendices"
37607 \begin_layout Subsection
37609 \begin_inset space ~
37615 \begin_layout Standard
37616 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
37617 default output format for the document (menu
37619 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37620 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37621 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37623 \begin_inset space ~
37627 \begin_inset space ~
37633 \begin_inset space ~
37637 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37639 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
37643 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
37646 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37647 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37649 \begin_inset space ~
37652 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37654 \begin_inset space ~
37657 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37659 \begin_inset space ~
37663 \begin_inset space ~
37669 \begin_inset space ~
37673 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37675 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37679 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
37680 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37682 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37683 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37685 \begin_inset space ~
37688 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37690 \begin_inset space ~
37693 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37697 \begin_inset space ~
37701 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37703 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37708 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37709 when it is first configured.
37710 The default output format is
37713 \begin_inset space ~
37721 \begin_layout Subsection
37722 View (Other Formats)
37725 \begin_layout Standard
37726 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
37727 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
37728 actual document with an external program.
37729 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
37730 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37731 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
37733 All possible formats are listed in section
37734 \begin_inset space ~
37738 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37740 reference "subsec:Export"
37745 You should at least see the menu entry
37750 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37752 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37754 \begin_inset space ~
37758 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37760 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37765 \begin_inset Index idx
37768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37769 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37778 \begin_layout Standard
37779 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
37780 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37782 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37783 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37785 \begin_inset space ~
37788 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37790 \begin_inset space ~
37793 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37797 \begin_inset space ~
37801 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37803 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37808 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37809 when it is first configured.
37812 \begin_layout Subsection
37814 \begin_inset space ~
37820 \begin_layout Standard
37821 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
37822 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
37825 \begin_layout Subsection
37826 Update (Other Formats)
37829 \begin_layout Standard
37830 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
37831 your document without opening a new viewer window.
37834 \begin_layout Subsection
37835 View Master Document
37838 \begin_layout Standard
37839 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37855 \begin_inset space ~
37860 manual for more information on this topic).
37861 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
37862 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
37866 \begin_inset space ~
37870 \begin_inset space ~
37875 generates the output of the whole book, while
37879 will just output the chapter alone.
37882 \begin_layout Standard
37883 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37884 in the document settings (menu
37886 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37887 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37888 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37890 \begin_inset space ~
37894 \begin_inset space ~
37900 \begin_inset space ~
37904 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37906 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
37910 ) or in the preferences (menu
37912 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37913 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37915 \begin_inset space ~
37918 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37920 \begin_inset space ~
37923 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37925 \begin_inset space ~
37929 \begin_inset space ~
37935 \begin_inset space ~
37939 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37941 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37948 \begin_layout Subsection
37949 Update Master Document
37952 \begin_layout Standard
37953 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37955 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37969 \begin_inset space ~
37974 manual for more information on this topic).
37975 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
37976 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
37979 \begin_layout Standard
37980 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37981 in the document settings (menu
37983 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37984 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37985 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37987 \begin_inset space ~
37991 \begin_inset space ~
37997 \begin_inset space ~
38001 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38003 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
38007 ) or in the preferences (menu
38009 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38010 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38012 \begin_inset space ~
38015 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
38017 \begin_inset space ~
38020 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
38022 \begin_inset space ~
38026 \begin_inset space ~
38032 \begin_inset space ~
38036 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38038 reference "sec:File-Formats"
38045 \begin_layout Subsection
38047 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38049 name "subsec:Compressed"
38056 \begin_layout Standard
38057 Un/compresses the current document.
38058 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
38059 compression (see the
38061 Additional Features
38063 manual for details).
38066 \begin_layout Subsection
38070 \begin_layout Standard
38071 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
38074 \begin_layout Subsection
38078 \begin_layout Standard
38079 The document settings are described in appendix
38080 \begin_inset space ~
38084 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38086 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
38093 \begin_layout Section
38095 \begin_inset Index idx
38098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38107 \begin_layout Subsection
38111 \begin_layout Standard
38112 Spell checking is explained in section
38113 \begin_inset space ~
38117 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38119 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
38126 \begin_layout Subsection
38130 \begin_layout Standard
38131 The thesaurus is described in section
38132 \begin_inset space ~
38136 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38138 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
38145 \begin_layout Subsection
38147 \begin_inset Index idx
38150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38157 \begin_inset Index idx
38160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38169 \begin_layout Standard
38170 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
38171 the highlighted document part.
38174 \begin_layout Subsection
38180 \begin_inset Index idx
38183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38184 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
38193 \begin_layout Standard
38194 Generates with the help of the program
38196 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
38199 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
38200 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
38201 This feature is not available on Windows.
38204 \begin_layout Subsection
38210 \begin_inset Index idx
38213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38223 \begin_layout Standard
38224 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38229 \begin_inset space ~
38234 to see the full filename paths.
38237 \begin_layout Subsection
38239 \begin_inset Index idx
38242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38251 \begin_layout Standard
38252 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
38253 files as described in section
38254 \begin_inset space ~
38258 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38260 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
38267 \begin_layout Subsection
38269 \begin_inset Index idx
38272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38285 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38303 \begin_inset Index idx
38306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38307 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38316 \begin_layout Standard
38317 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
38318 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
38319 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38320 -packages and programs it needs; see
38322 \begin_inset space ~
38326 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38328 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
38335 \begin_layout Subsection
38339 \begin_layout Standard
38344 dialog as described in detail in appendix
38345 \begin_inset space ~
38349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38351 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
38358 \begin_layout Section
38360 \begin_inset Index idx
38363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38372 \begin_layout Standard
38373 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
38374 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
38376 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
38380 \begin_layout Standard
38384 \begin_inset space ~
38389 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
38390 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38391 packages and classes found
38392 by \SpecialChar LyX
38394 \begin_inset space ~
38398 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38400 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
38407 \begin_layout Standard
38411 \begin_inset space ~
38416 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
38421 \begin_layout Section
38423 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38425 name "sec:Toolbars"
38432 \begin_layout Standard
38433 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
38434 \begin_inset space ~
38438 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38440 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
38447 \begin_layout Standard
38448 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
38449 This is described in the
38451 Additional Features
38456 \begin_layout Subsection
38458 \begin_inset Index idx
38461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38470 \begin_layout Standard
38471 \begin_inset Graphics
38472 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
38480 \begin_layout Standard
38481 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38487 \begin_layout Standard
38488 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38505 \begin_inset Note Note
38508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38509 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
38514 manual for more information.
38522 \begin_layout Standard
38523 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38529 \begin_layout Standard
38530 \begin_inset Tabular
38531 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
38532 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38533 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38534 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38540 \begin_inset Graphics
38541 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
38551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38555 pull-down box for the environments
38568 \begin_layout Standard
38569 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
38575 \begin_layout Standard
38577 \begin_inset Tabular
38578 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
38579 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38580 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38581 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38582 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38605 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38612 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38635 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38642 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38665 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38672 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38681 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38695 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38702 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38711 arg "spelling-continuously"
38719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38723 Spellcheck continuously
38729 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38752 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38759 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38782 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38789 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38812 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38819 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38842 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38849 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38872 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38879 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38888 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
38896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38902 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38904 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38908 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38912 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38921 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38928 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38942 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38944 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38948 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38952 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38961 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38970 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
38978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38984 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
38985 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
38992 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39013 Emphasize text, function of the
39015 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39017 \begin_inset space ~
39020 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39029 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39050 Set text to noun style, function of the
39052 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39054 \begin_inset space ~
39057 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39066 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39075 arg "textstyle-apply"
39083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39087 Format text using the current settings in the
39089 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39091 \begin_inset space ~
39094 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39103 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39126 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39127 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
39129 \begin_inset space ~
39138 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39147 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
39155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39161 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39168 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39175 arg "tabular-insert"
39183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39189 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39196 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39205 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
39213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39217 Toggle outline window on/off,
39219 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
39226 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39235 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
39243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39247 Toggle math toolbar on/off
39253 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39262 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
39270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39274 Toggle table toolbar on/off
39287 \begin_layout Subsection
39289 \begin_inset Index idx
39292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39301 \begin_layout Standard
39302 \begin_inset Graphics
39303 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
39311 \begin_layout Standard
39312 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39318 \begin_layout Standard
39319 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39323 \begin_layout Standard
39324 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39330 \begin_layout Standard
39331 \begin_inset Tabular
39332 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
39333 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39334 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39335 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39336 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39363 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39372 arg "layout Enumerate"
39380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39390 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39399 arg "layout Itemize"
39407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39417 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39444 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39453 arg "layout Description"
39461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39471 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39480 arg "depth-increment"
39488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39494 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39496 \begin_inset space ~
39500 \begin_inset space ~
39509 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39518 arg "depth-decrement"
39526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39532 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39534 \begin_inset space ~
39538 \begin_inset space ~
39547 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39556 arg "float-insert figure"
39564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39570 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39571 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39578 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39587 arg "float-insert table"
39595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39601 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39602 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39609 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39632 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39639 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39648 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
39656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39662 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39669 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39678 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
39686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39692 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39699 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39722 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39724 \begin_inset space ~
39733 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39742 arg "nomencl-insert"
39750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39756 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39758 \begin_inset space ~
39767 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39776 arg "footnote-insert"
39784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39790 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39797 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39806 arg "marginalnote-insert"
39814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39820 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39822 \begin_inset space ~
39831 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39854 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39855 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
39857 \begin_inset space ~
39866 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39875 arg "box-insert Frameless"
39883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39889 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39896 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39919 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39926 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39949 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39951 \begin_inset space ~
39960 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39969 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
39977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39983 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39984 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
39991 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40000 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
40008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40014 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40015 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40017 \begin_inset space ~
40026 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40035 arg "dialog-show character"
40043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40049 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40051 \begin_inset space ~
40054 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
40061 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40070 arg "layout-paragraph"
40078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40084 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40086 \begin_inset space ~
40095 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40104 arg "thesaurus-entry"
40112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40118 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40132 \begin_layout Subsection
40133 View/Update Toolbar
40134 \begin_inset Index idx
40137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40138 Toolbar ! View / Update
40146 \begin_layout Standard
40147 \begin_inset Graphics
40148 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
40155 \begin_layout Standard
40156 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40162 \begin_layout Standard
40163 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
40167 \begin_layout Standard
40168 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40174 \begin_layout Standard
40175 \begin_inset Tabular
40176 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
40177 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40178 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40179 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40180 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40203 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40210 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40219 arg "buffer-update"
40227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40233 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40240 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40249 arg "master-buffer-view"
40257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40263 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40265 \begin_inset space ~
40274 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40283 arg "master-buffer-update"
40291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40297 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40299 \begin_inset space ~
40303 \begin_inset space ~
40312 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40321 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
40329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40335 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40336 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40337 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40338 Synchronize with Output
40344 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40367 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40368 View (Other Formats)
40374 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40381 arg "update-others"
40389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40395 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40396 Update (Other Formats)
40409 \begin_layout Standard
40410 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
40414 \begin_layout Subsection
40418 \begin_layout Standard
40419 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
40420 \begin_inset space ~
40424 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40426 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40430 , the table toolbar
40431 \begin_inset Index idx
40434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40443 \begin_inset space ~
40448 manual and the math macro toolbar
40449 \begin_inset Index idx
40452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40465 \begin_layout Chapter
40466 The Document Settings
40467 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40469 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40474 \begin_inset Index idx
40477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40478 Document ! Settings
40486 \begin_layout Standard
40490 \begin_inset space ~
40495 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
40496 is called with the menu
40498 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40502 You can save your document settings as default with the
40504 Save as Document Defaults
40506 button in any dialog.
40507 This will create a template named
40511 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
40512 when you create a new document without
40516 \begin_layout Standard
40521 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
40522 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
40525 \begin_layout Standard
40526 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
40527 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
40528 to find the one you are looking for.
40529 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
40530 the submenus of the dialog.
40532 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40536 \begin_inset space \space{}
40540 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40544 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40547 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
40548 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
40549 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
40552 \begin_layout Section
40556 \begin_layout Standard
40557 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
40559 Document classes are described in section
40560 \begin_inset space ~
40564 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40566 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
40574 \begin_layout Standard
40578 \begin_inset space ~
40583 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
40588 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
40589 as a layout for a document class.
40590 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
40592 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
40601 \begin_layout Standard
40602 Some classes use special class options by default.
40603 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
40607 and you can decide to use them or not.
40608 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
40609 recommended you leave them untouched.
40614 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40615 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
40620 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40622 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
40627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40628 When you want to use one of the following drivers
40629 \begin_inset Newline newline
40634 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
40637 \begin_inset Newline newline
40640 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40641 distribution, see section
40646 \begin_inset CommandInset href
40648 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
40660 \begin_layout Standard
40665 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
40666 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
40667 in the background if the child document
40668 is opened without its master.
40669 This way child documents are always compilable.
40670 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
40677 \begin_inset space ~
40685 \begin_layout Standard
40686 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40697 \begin_inset Index idx
40700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40702 -packages ! prettyref
40708 \begin_inset Index idx
40711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40713 -packages ! refstyle
40718 for cross-references, see section
40719 \begin_inset space ~
40723 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40725 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40732 \begin_layout Section
40736 \begin_layout Standard
40737 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
40738 Please refer to the section
40741 \begin_inset space ~
40749 \begin_inset space ~
40754 manual for details.
40757 \begin_layout Section
40761 \begin_layout Standard
40762 Modules are explained in section
40763 \begin_inset space ~
40767 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40769 reference "subsec:Modules"
40776 \begin_layout Section
40780 \begin_layout Standard
40782 \begin_inset space ~
40786 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40788 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
40795 \begin_layout Section
40799 \begin_layout Standard
40800 The document font settings are described in section
40801 \begin_inset space ~
40805 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40807 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
40814 \begin_layout Section
40818 \begin_layout Standard
40819 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
40831 \begin_inset space ~
40836 and whether it should be a
40839 \begin_inset space ~
40844 can also be specified here.
40847 \begin_layout Standard
40848 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
40849 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
40850 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
40852 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
40855 \begin_layout Standard
40858 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
40861 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
40862 justifies the text on screen.
40863 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
40867 \begin_layout Section
40871 \begin_layout Standard
40872 This dialog is described in sections
40873 \begin_inset space ~
40877 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40879 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
40884 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40886 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
40893 \begin_layout Section
40897 \begin_layout Standard
40898 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
40899 \begin_inset space ~
40903 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40905 reference "subsec:Margins"
40912 \begin_layout Section
40914 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40916 name "sec:Language-encodings"
40921 \begin_inset Index idx
40924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40925 Language ! Encoding
40933 \begin_layout Standard
40934 The document language and quote styles are set here.
40935 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
40936 (the \SpecialChar LyX
40938 is always encoded in utf8).
40939 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
40940 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
40941 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
40942 -command is not known for
40943 a particular character).
40946 \begin_layout Standard
40947 If you use the option
40952 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
40953 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
40954 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40956 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
40957 exactly one encoding.
40958 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
40961 \begin_layout Standard
40963 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
40964 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
40965 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40966 installation supports Unicode), choose
40967 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
40968 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40969 is quite incomplete, so
40970 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
40975 (when \SpecialChar LyX
40976 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40977 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
40978 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40979 -commands is not used, because all
40980 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
40981 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
40982 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40983 , two new alternative engines
40984 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40986 Both engines support Unicode natively.
40988 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
40991 \begin_inset space ~
40999 \begin_inset space ~
41007 \begin_inset space ~
41013 \begin_inset space ~
41017 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41019 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
41024 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
41028 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
41031 \begin_layout Standard
41035 \begin_inset space ~
41040 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41041 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
41043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41051 The possible settings are:
41054 \begin_layout Description
41055 Default uses the language package that is selected in
41057 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41058 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41062 \begin_inset space ~
41066 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41068 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
41075 \begin_layout Description
41076 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
41077 format you will use.
41078 In many cases this will be
41083 \begin_inset Index idx
41086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41094 If the newer package
41099 \begin_inset Index idx
41102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41104 -packages ! polyglossia
41109 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41110 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41111 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
41113 this package will be used instead of
41120 \begin_layout Description
41122 \begin_inset space ~
41133 would be more appropriate.
41136 \begin_layout Description
41137 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
41138 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
41142 (for German texts), type in
41145 \begin_inset Newline newline
41150 usepackage{ngerman}
41153 \begin_layout Description
41154 None will not use a language package.
41155 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
41158 \begin_layout Standard
41159 Here is a list with the important encodings:
41162 \begin_layout Description
41164 \begin_inset space ~
41168 \begin_inset space ~
41172 \begin_inset space ~
41179 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41185 \begin_inset Index idx
41188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41190 -packages ! inputenc
41196 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
41197 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
41198 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
41202 \begin_layout Description
41203 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
41205 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
41206 commands, which may result in a big
41207 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
41208 -commands are needed.
41211 \begin_layout Description
41213 \begin_inset space ~
41217 \begin_inset space ~
41220 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
41223 \begin_layout Description
41225 \begin_inset space ~
41229 \begin_inset space ~
41232 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
41235 \begin_layout Description
41237 \begin_inset space ~
41240 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
41243 \begin_layout Description
41245 \begin_inset space ~
41249 \begin_inset space ~
41252 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
41253 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
41256 \begin_layout Description
41258 \begin_inset space ~
41262 \begin_inset space ~
41265 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
41269 \begin_layout Description
41271 \begin_inset space ~
41275 \begin_inset space ~
41278 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
41279 ISO-8859-13 encoding
41282 \begin_layout Description
41284 \begin_inset space ~
41288 \begin_inset space ~
41292 \begin_inset space ~
41295 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
41296 \begin_inset space ~
41302 \begin_layout Description
41304 \begin_inset space ~
41308 \begin_inset space ~
41312 \begin_inset space ~
41315 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
41316 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
41319 \begin_layout Description
41321 \begin_inset space ~
41325 \begin_inset space ~
41328 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
41329 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
41330 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41331 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
41332 \begin_inset space ~
41336 \begin_inset space ~
41342 \begin_layout Description
41344 \begin_inset space ~
41348 \begin_inset space ~
41351 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
41352 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
41353 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41355 should try to use the encoding Unicode
41356 \begin_inset space ~
41360 \begin_inset space ~
41366 \begin_layout Description
41368 \begin_inset space ~
41372 \begin_inset space ~
41375 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
41378 \begin_layout Description
41380 \begin_inset space ~
41384 \begin_inset space ~
41387 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
41390 \begin_layout Description
41392 \begin_inset space ~
41396 \begin_inset space ~
41399 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
41402 \begin_layout Description
41404 \begin_inset space ~
41407 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
41410 \begin_layout Description
41412 \begin_inset space ~
41415 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
41418 \begin_layout Description
41420 \begin_inset space ~
41424 \begin_inset space ~
41427 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
41430 \begin_layout Description
41432 \begin_inset space ~
41436 \begin_inset space ~
41442 \begin_layout Description
41444 \begin_inset space ~
41448 \begin_inset space ~
41451 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
41454 \begin_layout Description
41456 \begin_inset space ~
41460 \begin_inset space ~
41466 \begin_layout Description
41468 \begin_inset space ~
41472 \begin_inset space ~
41475 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41481 \begin_inset Index idx
41484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41491 , when using this, set the document language to
41496 \begin_layout Description
41498 \begin_inset space ~
41502 \begin_inset space ~
41505 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41510 , when using this, set the document language to
41513 \begin_inset space ~
41519 \begin_layout Description
41521 \begin_inset space ~
41525 \begin_inset space ~
41528 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41534 \begin_inset Index idx
41537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41539 -packages ! japanese
41544 , when using this, set the document language to
41549 \begin_layout Description
41551 \begin_inset space ~
41555 \begin_inset space ~
41558 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41563 , when using this, set the document language to
41568 \begin_layout Description
41570 \begin_inset space ~
41574 \begin_inset space ~
41577 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41582 , when using this, set the document language to
41587 \begin_layout Description
41589 \begin_inset space ~
41592 (EUC-KR) for Korean
41595 \begin_layout Description
41597 \begin_inset space ~
41601 \begin_inset space ~
41605 \begin_inset space ~
41608 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
41611 \begin_layout Description
41613 \begin_inset space ~
41617 \begin_inset space ~
41621 \begin_inset space ~
41624 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
41625 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
41626 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
41629 \begin_layout Description
41631 \begin_inset space ~
41635 \begin_inset space ~
41641 \begin_layout Description
41643 \begin_inset space ~
41647 \begin_inset space ~
41650 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
41651 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
41654 \begin_layout Description
41656 \begin_inset space ~
41660 \begin_inset space ~
41663 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41669 \begin_inset Index idx
41672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41679 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
41682 \begin_layout Description
41684 \begin_inset space ~
41692 \begin_inset space ~
41695 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
41702 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41705 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41712 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41713 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41715 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
41718 \begin_layout Description
41720 \begin_inset space ~
41724 \begin_inset space ~
41727 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41733 \begin_inset Index idx
41736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41743 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
41746 \begin_layout Description
41748 \begin_inset space ~
41751 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41757 \begin_inset Index idx
41760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41762 -packages ! inputenc
41768 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
41772 \begin_layout Description
41774 \begin_inset space ~
41778 \begin_inset space ~
41782 \begin_inset space ~
41785 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
41786 \begin_inset space ~
41792 \begin_layout Description
41794 \begin_inset space ~
41798 \begin_inset space ~
41802 \begin_inset space ~
41805 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
41806 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
41807 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
41811 \begin_layout Description
41813 \begin_inset space ~
41817 \begin_inset space ~
41821 \begin_inset space ~
41824 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
41825 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
41828 \begin_layout Section
41830 \begin_inset Index idx
41833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41840 \begin_inset Index idx
41843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41850 \begin_inset Index idx
41853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41854 Color ! Shaded boxes
41860 \begin_inset Index idx
41863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41864 Color ! Greyed-out notes
41872 \begin_layout Standard
41873 Here you can alter the font color for the
41877 (default: black), for
41880 \begin_inset space ~
41885 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
41889 (default: white) and for
41892 \begin_inset space ~
41902 sets the color back to the default.
41905 \begin_layout Standard
41906 Clicking any button showing
41914 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
41915 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
41916 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
41917 later more quickly.
41920 \begin_layout Standard
41921 Note, if you change the
41924 \begin_inset space ~
41929 font color and use the option
41932 \begin_inset space ~
41937 in the document settings under
41940 \begin_inset space ~
41945 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
41946 \begin_inset space ~
41950 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41952 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41959 \begin_layout Standard
41960 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41966 \begin_layout Standard
41970 \begin_inset space ~
41979 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
41982 \begin_inset space ~
41985 Code after a forced page break:
41988 \begin_layout Itemize
41989 For the page color:
41990 \begin_inset Newline newline
41997 pagecolor{color name}
42000 \begin_layout Itemize
42001 For the text color:
42002 \begin_inset Newline newline
42012 \begin_layout Standard
42013 You are restricted to one of
42049 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
42056 \begin_inset space ~
42062 \begin_inset Newline newline
42065 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
42066 names to refer to them:
42069 \begin_layout Itemize
42075 \begin_inset Newline newline
42080 page_backgroundcolor
42083 \begin_layout Itemize
42087 \begin_inset space ~
42093 \begin_inset Newline newline
42101 \begin_layout Itemize
42105 \begin_inset space ~
42111 \begin_inset Newline newline
42119 \begin_layout Itemize
42123 \begin_inset space ~
42129 \begin_inset Newline newline
42137 \begin_layout Standard
42138 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
42141 \begin_inset space ~
42149 \begin_inset space ~
42157 \begin_layout Section
42161 \begin_layout Standard
42162 Here you can adjust the
42166 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
42170 as described in section
42171 \begin_inset space ~
42175 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42177 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
42184 \begin_layout Section
42188 \begin_layout Standard
42189 Here you can specify if a citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42195 \begin_inset Index idx
42198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42210 \begin_inset Index idx
42213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42215 -packages ! jurabib
42223 Sectioned bibliography
42225 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42231 \begin_inset Index idx
42234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42236 -packages ! bibtopic
42241 and you can select a
42245 for the generation of the bibliography.
42246 For a further description see section
42247 \begin_inset space ~
42251 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42253 reference "sec:Bibliography"
42260 \begin_layout Section
42264 \begin_layout Standard
42265 Here you can define the
42269 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
42271 \begin_inset space ~
42275 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42277 reference "sec:Index"
42284 \begin_layout Section
42288 \begin_layout Standard
42289 The PDF properties are explained in section
42290 \begin_inset space ~
42294 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42296 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
42303 \begin_layout Section
42307 \begin_layout Standard
42308 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
42309 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42315 \begin_inset Index idx
42318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42320 -packages ! amsmath
42330 \begin_inset Index idx
42333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42335 -packages ! amssymb
42345 \begin_inset Index idx
42348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42360 \begin_inset Index idx
42363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42375 \begin_inset Index idx
42378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42380 -packages ! mathdots
42390 \begin_inset Index idx
42393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42395 -packages ! mathtools
42405 \begin_inset Index idx
42408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42420 \begin_inset Index idx
42423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42425 -packages ! stackrel
42435 \begin_inset Index idx
42438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42440 -packages ! stmaryrd
42450 \begin_inset Index idx
42453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42455 -packages ! undertilde
42460 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
42463 \begin_layout Description
42464 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42465 -errors in formulas,
42466 ensure that you have this enabled.
42469 \begin_layout Description
42470 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
42471 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42472 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
42476 \begin_layout Description
42477 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
42480 \begin_inset space ~
42492 \begin_layout Description
42493 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
42496 \begin_inset space ~
42508 \begin_layout Description
42509 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
42520 \begin_layout Description
42521 mathtools is used for the math commands
42557 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
42564 \begin_layout Description
42565 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
42567 Chemical Symbols and Equations
42576 \begin_layout Description
42577 stackrel is used for the math command
42594 \begin_layout Description
42595 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
42598 \begin_layout Description
42599 undertilde is used for the math command
42607 Accents for one Character
42616 \begin_layout Section
42620 \begin_layout Standard
42621 The float placement options are described in the section
42624 \begin_inset space ~
42632 \begin_inset space ~
42640 \begin_layout Section
42644 \begin_layout Standard
42645 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
42647 Program Code Listings
42652 \begin_inset space ~
42660 \begin_layout Section
42664 \begin_layout Standard
42665 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
42673 set to be used and set the
42678 The itemize environment is described in section
42679 \begin_inset space ~
42683 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42685 reference "sec:Itemize"
42692 \begin_layout Standard
42693 You can furthermore specify a
42696 \begin_inset space ~
42701 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42702 command of the desired character.
42703 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
42710 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
42712 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42716 \begin_inset space \space{}
42720 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
42730 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
42731 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
42734 \begin_layout Standard
42735 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42743 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42744 -packages in the preamble (menu
42747 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42748 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42751 \begin_inset space ~
42757 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
42761 usepackage{textcomp}
42764 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
42768 usepackage{amssymb}
42778 \begin_layout Section
42782 \begin_layout Standard
42783 Branches are described in section
42784 \begin_inset space ~
42788 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42790 reference "sec:Branches"
42797 \begin_layout Section
42799 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42801 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
42808 \begin_layout Standard
42809 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
42812 \begin_layout Description
42814 \begin_inset space ~
42818 \begin_inset space ~
42821 Format: The format that is used when you enter
42822 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42830 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42834 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42841 View Master Document
42842 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42846 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42849 Update Master Document
42850 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42857 menu or the toolbar.
42858 The default is set in
42860 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42861 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42863 \begin_inset space ~
42866 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42870 \begin_inset space ~
42874 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42876 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42883 \begin_layout Description
42885 \begin_inset space ~
42889 \begin_inset space ~
42892 Output settings for the menu
42894 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42896 \begin_inset space ~
42902 For a detailed description see section
42904 Reverse DVI/PDF search
42909 \begin_inset space ~
42917 \begin_layout Description
42919 \begin_inset space ~
42923 \begin_inset space ~
42926 Options offers settings for the export format
42934 \begin_inset space ~
42939 will assure that the output follows exactly version
42940 \begin_inset space ~
42943 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
42947 \begin_inset space ~
42952 settings are described in detail in section
42954 Math Output in XHTML
42959 \begin_inset space ~
42968 \begin_inset space ~
42972 \begin_inset space ~
42977 is used for the size of equations in the output.
42980 \begin_layout Description
42982 \begin_inset space ~
42987 Save transient properties
42989 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
42990 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
42991 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
42995 \begin_layout Itemize
42996 the activation of change tracking
42999 \begin_layout Itemize
43000 the output of tracked changes
43003 \begin_layout Itemize
43004 the recording of the document directory path.
43007 \begin_layout Standard
43008 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
43009 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
43013 \begin_layout Section
43021 \begin_layout Standard
43022 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
43024 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
43026 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43028 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
43032 \begin_layout Standard
43033 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43034 -syntax is given in section
43035 \begin_inset space ~
43039 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43041 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
43048 \begin_layout Chapter
43054 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43056 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
43061 \begin_inset Index idx
43064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43073 \begin_layout Standard
43074 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
43076 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43080 It has the following submenus.
43083 \begin_layout Section
43087 \begin_layout Subsection
43091 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43092 User Interface File
43093 \begin_inset Index idx
43096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43097 Customization ! of toolbars
43103 \begin_inset Index idx
43106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43107 Customization ! of menus
43115 \begin_layout Standard
43116 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
43117 interface (ui) file.
43118 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
43126 \begin_layout Description
43131 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
43134 \begin_layout Description
43141 the menu entries in popup context menus
43144 \begin_layout Description
43149 specifies the toolbar buttons
43152 \begin_layout Standard
43153 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
43154 and edit the entries.
43157 \begin_layout Standard
43158 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
43170 entries must be finished with an explicit
43195 and in the case of the
43196 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43208 The syntax for the entries is:
43211 \begin_layout Standard
43212 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43218 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43226 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43230 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43241 \begin_layout Standard
43243 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43246 All the \SpecialChar LyX
43247 -functions are listed in the menu
43249 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
43251 \begin_inset space ~
43259 \begin_layout Standard
43260 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
43266 \begin_layout Standard
43267 For example, assuming you use the menu
43269 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
43272 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
43276 \begin_layout Standard
43277 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43283 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43287 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43291 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43295 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43301 \begin_layout Standard
43303 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43307 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43311 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43318 to have the sixth bookmark.
43321 \begin_layout Standard
43325 \begin_inset space ~
43330 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
43331 's toolbar buttons.
43332 The currently available icon sets are compared in
43333 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43336 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
43343 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43347 \begin_layout Standard
43350 Enable tool tips in main work area
43352 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
43356 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43360 \begin_layout Standard
43365 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
43366 should display in the menu
43368 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43370 \begin_inset space ~
43378 \begin_layout Subsection
43382 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43386 \begin_layout Standard
43389 Restore window layouts and geometries
43392 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
43393 the last \SpecialChar LyX
43397 \begin_layout Standard
43400 Restore cursor positions
43402 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
43406 \begin_layout Standard
43409 Load opened files from last session
43411 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
43415 \begin_layout Standard
43418 Clear all session information
43420 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
43421 sessions (cursor positions, names
43422 of last opened documents, etc.).
43425 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43427 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43429 name "subsec:Backup documents"
43434 \begin_inset Index idx
43437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43446 \begin_layout Standard
43449 Backup original documents when saving
43451 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
43452 it was saved the last time.
43453 It is stored in the
43456 \begin_inset space ~
43462 \begin_inset space ~
43466 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43468 reference "sec:Paths"
43472 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
43475 \begin_inset space ~
43481 The backup file has the file extension
43482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43490 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43496 \begin_layout Standard
43499 Backup documents, every
43501 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
43504 \begin_layout Standard
43507 Save documents compressed by default
43509 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
43510 \begin_inset space ~
43514 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43516 reference "subsec:Compressed"
43521 This applies to newly created documents only.
43522 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
43525 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43526 Windows & work area
43529 \begin_layout Standard
43532 Open documents in tabs
43534 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
43538 \begin_layout Standard
43543 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
43548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43550 \begin_inset space ~
43554 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43556 reference "sec:Paths"
43560 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
43567 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
43568 documents will be opened in the same running instance
43569 of \SpecialChar LyX
43571 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
43572 instance is created for each file.
43575 \begin_layout Standard
43578 Single close-tab button
43580 is checked, there will only be one close button (
43590 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
43591 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
43594 \begin_layout Standard
43595 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43603 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
43604 before the change takes effect.
43612 \begin_layout Standard
43617 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
43619 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
43621 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
43625 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
43626 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
43627 and only want to close the view in once instance.
43630 \begin_layout Subsection
43632 \begin_inset Index idx
43635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43642 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43644 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
43651 \begin_layout Standard
43652 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
43656 \begin_layout Standard
43657 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43665 This section only deals with the fonts
43669 the \SpecialChar LyX
43671 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
43674 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43675 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43686 \begin_layout Standard
43687 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
43704 (depends on the system) as its
43707 \begin_inset space ~
43723 \begin_layout Standard
43724 You can change the font size with the
43731 \begin_layout Standard
43736 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
43738 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43741 points have the size of 1
43742 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43746 \begin_inset space ~
43750 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43752 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
43757 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
43758 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43762 The sizes are explained in detail in section
43763 \begin_inset space ~
43767 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43769 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
43776 \begin_layout Standard
43779 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
43781 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
43782 needs to redraw the screen less often.
43783 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
43784 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
43785 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
43787 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
43788 \begin_inset space ~
43794 \begin_layout Subsection
43796 \begin_inset Index idx
43799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43800 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
43807 \begin_inset Index idx
43810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43819 \begin_layout Standard
43820 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
43821 by choosing an item in the
43822 list and selecting the
43829 \begin_layout Standard
43830 By checking the option
43834 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
43837 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
43838 \begin_inset space ~
43842 \begin_inset space ~
43847 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
43850 \begin_layout Subsection
43852 \begin_inset Index idx
43855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43864 \begin_layout Standard
43865 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
43869 \begin_layout Standard
43874 enables previewing snippets of your document.
43875 This feature is described in section
43876 \begin_inset space ~
43880 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43882 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43889 \begin_layout Standard
43890 Checking the option
43893 \begin_inset space ~
43897 \begin_inset space ~
43901 \begin_inset space ~
43906 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
43909 \begin_layout Section
43911 \begin_inset Index idx
43914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43923 \begin_layout Subsection
43927 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43931 \begin_layout Standard
43934 Cursor follows scrollbar
43936 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
43940 \begin_layout Standard
43941 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
43942 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
43943 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
43946 \begin_layout Standard
43949 Scroll below end of document
43951 is self-explanatory.
43954 \begin_layout Standard
43955 In \SpecialChar LyX
43956 one can jump from word to word by pressing
43963 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
43965 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
43966 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
43969 \begin_layout Standard
43972 Sort environments alphabetically
43974 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43977 \begin_layout Standard
43980 Group environments by their category
43982 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43985 \begin_layout Standard
43990 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
44001 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44005 \begin_layout Standard
44006 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
44011 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
44012 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
44016 \begin_layout Subsection
44018 \begin_inset Index idx
44021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44028 \begin_inset Index idx
44031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44032 Settings ! Shortcuts
44040 \begin_layout Standard
44045 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
44047 Several binding files are available, among them:
44050 \begin_layout Description
44051 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
44054 \begin_layout Description
44055 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
44067 \begin_layout Description
44068 mac.bind a set of bindings for
44071 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44079 \begin_layout Standard
44080 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
44085 , and binding files for special languages.
44086 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
44087 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44091 \begin_inset space \space{}
44095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44099 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44103 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
44104 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
44105 will try to use the appropriate binding
44109 \begin_layout Standard
44110 Some binding files, like
44114 , only have a limited scope.
44115 When looking at the end of the file
44119 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
44122 \begin_layout Standard
44126 \begin_inset space ~
44130 \begin_inset space ~
44135 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
44136 in the selected key binding file.
44139 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44141 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44143 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
44148 \begin_inset Index idx
44151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44152 Key Bindings ! Editing
44160 \begin_layout Standard
44161 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
44162 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
44163 functions and the bound shortcuts.
44164 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
44167 Show key-bindings containing
44170 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
44171 Insert there for example as keyword
44172 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44176 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44179 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
44180 functions that contain
44181 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44185 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44189 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
44190 All \SpecialChar LyX
44191 functions are also listed in the file
44196 that you will find in the
44203 \begin_layout Standard
44204 For example, to add the shortcut
44212 , select the function and press the
44217 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
44218 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
44221 \begin_layout Standard
44222 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
44223 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
44225 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
44226 function names as a semicolon separated list.
44228 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
44233 \begin_layout Standard
44234 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
44237 \begin_layout Standard
44238 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
44240 The syntax of the entries is:
44243 \begin_layout Standard
44249 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44253 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44257 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44268 \begin_layout Subsection
44270 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44272 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
44277 \begin_inset Index idx
44280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44287 \begin_inset Index idx
44290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44291 Settings ! Keyboard Map
44299 \begin_layout Standard
44300 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
44301 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
44302 provides keyboard maps.
44303 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
44304 is a Romanian one, you can enable
44307 \begin_inset space ~
44311 \begin_inset space ~
44316 and select the keyboard map file named
44323 \begin_layout Standard
44332 keyboard map and, if you use the
44336 bindings, you can select the first and second with
44339 arg "keymap-primary"
44345 arg "keymap-secondary"
44348 respectively or toggle between them with
44351 arg "keymap-toggle"
44357 \begin_layout Standard
44358 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44366 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
44375 \begin_layout Standard
44376 You can also specify the mouse
44378 Wheel scrolling speed
44381 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
44385 Middle mouse button pasting
44387 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
44388 inserts the content of the clipboard.
44391 \begin_layout Standard
44399 \begin_inset space ~
44403 \begin_inset space ~
44408 you can select a key for zooming.
44409 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
44412 \begin_layout Subsection
44416 \begin_layout Standard
44417 Input completion is described in section
44418 \begin_inset space ~
44422 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44424 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
44431 \begin_layout Section
44433 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44440 \begin_inset Index idx
44443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44450 \begin_inset Index idx
44453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44462 \begin_layout Standard
44463 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
44464 are normally determined during
44466 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
44469 \begin_layout Description
44471 \begin_inset space ~
44474 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
44475 's working directory.
44476 It is the default when you
44487 \begin_inset space ~
44495 \begin_layout Description
44497 \begin_inset space ~
44500 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
44502 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44504 \begin_inset space ~
44508 \begin_inset space ~
44516 \begin_layout Description
44518 \begin_inset space ~
44521 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
44527 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44531 \begin_inset Newline newline
44535 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44547 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
44548 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
44556 \begin_layout Description
44558 \begin_inset space ~
44562 \begin_inset Index idx
44565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44571 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
44572 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
44573 \begin_inset space ~
44577 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44579 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44587 will be used to save the backups.
44588 \begin_inset Newline newline
44591 Backup files have the ending
44592 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44596 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44602 \begin_layout Description
44604 \begin_inset space ~
44607 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
44608 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
44610 \begin_inset Newline newline
44617 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44623 You can edit this file with the program
44632 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
44633 in its preferences under
44636 \begin_inset space ~
44642 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
44647 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
44649 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
44650 in your \SpecialChar LyX
44656 and \SpecialChar LyX
44657 need to be running the same time.
44658 \begin_inset Newline newline
44661 The pipe is also used for the
44665 feature, see section
44666 \begin_inset space ~
44670 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44672 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44677 \begin_inset Newline newline
44680 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
44681 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
44682 \begin_inset Newline newline
44698 \begin_layout Description
44700 \begin_inset space ~
44703 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
44706 \begin_layout Description
44708 \begin_inset space ~
44711 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
44712 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
44713 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
44716 \begin_layout Description
44718 \begin_inset space ~
44721 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
44727 You only need to specify it if you are using
44731 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
44733 For \SpecialChar LyX
44738 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
44742 \begin_layout Description
44744 \begin_inset space ~
44747 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
44748 When \SpecialChar LyX
44749 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
44750 to find it on the system.
44751 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
44753 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
44755 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44759 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44762 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
44763 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
44766 \begin_layout Description
44768 \begin_inset space ~
44771 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
44772 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
44773 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
44774 code or in the document
44776 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
44778 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
44779 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
44780 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
44781 scanned for the input files.
44782 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
44783 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
44785 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
44786 compilation may fail for some documents.
44789 \begin_layout Section
44793 \begin_layout Standard
44794 Here you can insert your
44803 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
44805 \begin_inset space ~
44809 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44811 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44815 , to mark changes you make as yours.
44818 \begin_layout Section
44820 \begin_inset Index idx
44823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44824 Language ! Settings
44830 \begin_inset Index idx
44833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44834 Settings ! Language
44842 \begin_layout Subsection
44844 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44846 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
44853 \begin_layout Description
44855 \begin_inset space ~
44859 \begin_inset space ~
44862 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
44864 You can find its actual translation status here:
44865 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44867 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
44874 \begin_layout Description
44876 \begin_inset space ~
44879 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
44880 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
44881 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
44882 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
44883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44899 The most widespread language package is
44904 \begin_inset Index idx
44907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44914 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
44916 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44917 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44918 come with the alternative
44924 \begin_inset Index idx
44927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44929 -packages ! polyglossia
44934 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
44935 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
44941 The available selections are described in section
44942 \begin_inset space ~
44946 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44948 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
44955 \begin_layout Description
44957 \begin_inset space ~
44960 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
44961 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
44962 you can here specify the command to start the package.
44963 An example is the start command
44969 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
44971 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
44975 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44990 selectlanguage{$$lang}
44995 \begin_layout Description
44997 \begin_inset space ~
45005 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
45006 command toggles the package on and off.
45009 \begin_layout Description
45011 \begin_inset space ~
45015 \begin_inset space ~
45018 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
45022 \begin_layout Description
45024 \begin_inset space ~
45028 \begin_inset space ~
45031 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
45035 \begin_layout Description
45037 \begin_inset space ~
45041 \begin_inset space ~
45044 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
45045 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
45046 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
45048 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
45055 \begin_layout Description
45057 \begin_inset space ~
45060 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
45062 When this option is not set, the
45065 \begin_inset space ~
45070 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45072 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
45075 \begin_inset space ~
45083 \begin_layout Description
45085 \begin_inset space ~
45091 \begin_inset space ~
45097 When it is not set, the
45100 \begin_inset space ~
45105 is set to the end of the document.
45108 \begin_layout Description
45110 \begin_inset space ~
45114 \begin_inset space ~
45117 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
45118 language will be underlined in blue.
45121 \begin_layout Description
45123 \begin_inset space ~
45127 \begin_inset space ~
45130 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
45131 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
45134 \begin_layout Description
45136 \begin_inset space ~
45139 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
45140 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
45141 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
45142 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
45145 \begin_layout Subsection
45149 \begin_layout Standard
45150 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
45151 \begin_inset space ~
45155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45157 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
45164 \begin_layout Section
45168 \begin_layout Subsection
45170 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45172 name "subsec:General-output"
45179 \begin_layout Description
45181 \begin_inset space ~
45184 search Commands that will be used for the menu
45186 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45188 \begin_inset space ~
45194 For a detailed description see section
45196 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45201 \begin_inset space ~
45209 \begin_layout Description
45211 \begin_inset space ~
45214 Options Options for the program
45218 that is used for the export format
45223 \begin_inset space ~
45227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45229 reference "subsec:Export"
45234 Possible options are listed in the
45239 \begin_inset Newline newline
45243 \begin_inset Flex URL
45246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45248 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
45258 \begin_layout Description
45260 \begin_inset space ~
45264 \begin_inset space ~
45267 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
45270 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45271 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
45273 \begin_inset space ~
45279 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
45282 \begin_layout Description
45284 \begin_inset space ~
45288 \begin_inset Index idx
45291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45298 \begin_inset Index idx
45301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45302 Settings ! Date format
45307 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
45308 \begin_inset Newline newline
45312 \begin_inset Flex URL
45315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45317 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
45323 \begin_inset Newline newline
45326 For example the format
45327 \begin_inset Newline newline
45331 \begin_inset Newline newline
45334 prints the date as day/month/year.
45337 \begin_layout Description
45339 \begin_inset space ~
45343 \begin_inset space ~
45346 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
45347 is allowed to overwrite on export.
45350 \begin_layout Subsection
45356 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45358 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
45363 \begin_inset Index idx
45366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45367 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
45376 \begin_layout Description
45378 \begin_inset space ~
45386 \begin_inset space ~
45390 \begin_inset space ~
45393 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
45398 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
45419 are used for Cyrillic.
45420 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
45421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45433 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
45435 sets up in the background.
45436 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
45439 \begin_layout Description
45441 \begin_inset space ~
45445 \begin_inset space ~
45449 \begin_inset space ~
45453 \begin_inset space ~
45456 options They only have an effect when the program
45460 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
45463 \begin_layout Standard
45464 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
45465 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
45466 manuals of the applications.
45469 \begin_layout Description
45471 \begin_inset space ~
45474 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
45475 \begin_inset space ~
45479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45481 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
45488 \begin_layout Description
45490 \begin_inset space ~
45493 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
45494 \begin_inset space ~
45498 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45500 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
45507 \begin_layout Description
45509 \begin_inset space ~
45512 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
45513 \begin_inset space ~
45517 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45519 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
45526 \begin_layout Description
45532 \begin_inset space ~
45535 command Command for the program
45537 Check\SpecialChar TeX
45540 that is described in the section
45542 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
45547 Additional Features
45552 \begin_layout Standard
45553 There are additionally the following options:
45556 \begin_layout Description
45558 \begin_inset space ~
45562 \begin_inset space ~
45566 \begin_inset space ~
45570 \begin_inset space ~
45575 \begin_inset space ~
45578 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
45579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45596 to separate folders.
45597 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
45599 \begin_inset Index idx
45602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45609 \begin_inset Index idx
45612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45621 \begin_layout Description
45623 \begin_inset space ~
45627 \begin_inset space ~
45631 \begin_inset space ~
45635 \begin_inset space ~
45639 \begin_inset space ~
45643 \begin_inset space ~
45646 changes Removes all manually set
45652 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45653 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45655 \begin_inset space ~
45660 dialog when changing the document class.
45663 \begin_layout Section
45665 \begin_inset space ~
45669 \begin_inset Index idx
45672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45681 \begin_layout Subsection
45683 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45685 name "subsec:Converters"
45690 \begin_inset Index idx
45693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45702 \begin_layout Standard
45703 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
45704 from one format to another.
45705 You can modify converters or create new ones.
45706 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
45713 \begin_inset space ~
45718 field and press the
45723 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
45727 \begin_inset space ~
45732 drop-down list, modify the
45736 field and press the
45743 \begin_layout Standard
45746 Converter File Cache
45752 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
45754 Maximum Age (in days
45757 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
45758 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
45761 \begin_layout Standard
45762 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
45763 definition, is described in the section
45774 \begin_layout Subsection
45776 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45778 name "sec:File-Formats"
45783 \begin_inset Index idx
45786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45793 \begin_inset Index idx
45796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45805 \begin_layout Standard
45806 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
45816 programs that should be used for certain formats.
45819 \begin_layout Standard
45820 You can also define the
45822 Default output format
45824 that is used when you use
45826 View, Update, View Master Document
45830 Update Master Document
45836 menu or the toolbar.
45839 \begin_layout Standard
45840 More about formats and their options is described in the section
45851 \begin_layout Standard
45852 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
45854 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
45855 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
45856 This is done by specifying a
45861 More about this is described in the section
45872 \begin_layout Chapter
45873 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45875 \begin_inset Index idx
45878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45885 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45887 name "chap:Units-available-in"
45894 \begin_layout Standard
45896 \begin_inset space ~
45900 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45902 reference "tab:Units"
45906 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45907 and used in this documentation.
45910 \begin_layout Standard
45911 \begin_inset Float table
45917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45918 \begin_inset Caption Standard
45920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45921 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45936 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45944 \begin_inset Tabular
45945 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
45946 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
45947 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45948 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45949 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46082 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46086 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46119 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46123 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46155 scaled point (65536
46156 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46160 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46193 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46197 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46230 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46234 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
46238 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46271 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46275 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46307 % of original image width
46312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46589 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46593 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46623 \begin_layout Chapter
46625 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46627 name "chap:Credits"
46634 \begin_layout Standard
46635 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
46636 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
46639 \begin_layout Itemize
46642 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
46645 \begin_layout Itemize
46651 \begin_layout Itemize
46657 \begin_layout Itemize
46663 \begin_layout Itemize
46669 \begin_layout Itemize
46675 \begin_layout Itemize
46681 \begin_layout Itemize
46687 \begin_layout Itemize
46690 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
46693 \begin_layout Itemize
46699 \begin_layout Itemize
46705 \begin_layout Itemize
46711 \begin_layout Itemize
46717 \begin_layout Itemize
46723 \begin_layout Itemize
46729 \begin_layout Itemize
46735 \begin_layout Itemize
46741 \begin_layout Itemize
46742 The \SpecialChar LyX
46744 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
46753 \begin_layout Standard
46754 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46757 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
46764 \begin_layout Bibliography
46765 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46766 LatexCommand bibitem
46772 The \SpecialChar LyX
46774 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46777 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
46782 \begin_inset Newline newline
46786 \begin_inset Flex URL
46789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46791 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
46799 \begin_layout Bibliography
46800 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46801 LatexCommand bibitem
46802 key "latexcompanion"
46806 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
46808 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46809 Companion Second Edition.
46812 Addison-Wesley, 2004
46815 \begin_layout Bibliography
46816 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46817 LatexCommand bibitem
46822 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
46825 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
46829 Addison-Wesley, 2003
46832 \begin_layout Bibliography
46833 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46834 LatexCommand bibitem
46842 : A Document Preparation System.
46845 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
46848 \begin_layout Bibliography
46849 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46850 LatexCommand bibitem
46859 The \SpecialChar TeX
46863 Addison-Wesley, 1984
46866 \begin_layout Bibliography
46867 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46868 LatexCommand bibitem
46873 The \SpecialChar TeX
46875 \begin_inset Newline newline
46879 \begin_inset Flex URL
46882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46884 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
46892 \begin_layout Bibliography
46893 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46894 LatexCommand bibitem
46899 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46901 \begin_inset Newline newline
46905 \begin_inset Flex URL
46908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46910 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
46918 \begin_layout Bibliography
46919 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46920 LatexCommand bibitem
46926 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46928 name "Documentation"
46929 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
46935 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46939 \begin_inset Newline newline
46943 \begin_inset Flex URL
46946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46948 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
46956 \begin_layout Bibliography
46957 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46958 LatexCommand bibitem
46964 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46966 name "Documentation"
46967 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
46971 how to use the program
46973 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46977 \begin_inset Newline newline
46981 \begin_inset Flex URL
46984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46986 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
46994 \begin_layout Bibliography
46995 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46996 LatexCommand bibitem
47002 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47004 name "Documentation"
47005 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
47014 \begin_inset Newline newline
47018 \begin_inset Flex URL
47021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47023 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
47031 \begin_layout Bibliography
47032 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47033 LatexCommand bibitem
47034 key "makeindex-man"
47039 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47042 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
47051 \begin_inset Newline newline
47055 \begin_inset Flex URL
47058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47060 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
47068 \begin_layout Bibliography
47069 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47070 LatexCommand bibitem
47076 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47078 name "Documentation"
47079 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
47088 \begin_inset Newline newline
47092 \begin_inset Flex URL
47095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47097 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
47105 \begin_layout Bibliography
47106 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47107 LatexCommand bibitem
47113 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47115 name "Documentation"
47116 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
47120 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
47122 \begin_inset Newline newline
47126 \begin_inset Flex URL
47129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47131 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
47139 \begin_layout Bibliography
47140 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47141 LatexCommand bibitem
47147 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47149 name "Documentation"
47150 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
47154 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47160 \begin_inset Index idx
47163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47165 -packages ! caption
47171 \begin_inset Newline newline
47175 \begin_inset Flex URL
47178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47180 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
47188 \begin_layout Bibliography
47189 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47190 LatexCommand bibitem
47196 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47198 name "Documentation"
47199 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
47203 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47209 \begin_inset Index idx
47212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47214 -packages ! enumitem
47220 \begin_inset Newline newline
47224 \begin_inset Flex URL
47227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47229 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
47237 \begin_layout Bibliography
47238 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47239 LatexCommand bibitem
47245 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47247 name "Documentation"
47248 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
47252 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47258 \begin_inset Index idx
47261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47263 -packages ! fancyhdr
47269 \begin_inset Newline newline
47273 \begin_inset Flex URL
47276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47278 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
47286 \begin_layout Bibliography
47287 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47288 LatexCommand bibitem
47294 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47296 name "Documentation"
47297 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
47301 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47307 \begin_inset Index idx
47310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47312 -packages ! hyperref
47318 \begin_inset Newline newline
47322 \begin_inset Flex URL
47325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47327 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
47335 \begin_layout Bibliography
47336 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47337 LatexCommand bibitem
47343 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47345 name "Documentation"
47346 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
47350 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47356 \begin_inset Index idx
47359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47361 -packages ! nomencl
47367 \begin_inset Newline newline
47371 \begin_inset Flex URL
47374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47376 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
47384 \begin_layout Bibliography
47385 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47386 LatexCommand bibitem
47392 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47394 name "Documentation"
47395 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
47399 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47405 \begin_inset Index idx
47408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47410 -packages ! prettyref
47416 \begin_inset Newline newline
47420 \begin_inset Flex URL
47423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47425 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
47433 \begin_layout Bibliography
47434 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47435 LatexCommand bibitem
47441 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47443 name "Documentation"
47444 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
47448 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47454 \begin_inset Index idx
47457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47459 -packages ! refstyle
47465 \begin_inset Newline newline
47469 \begin_inset Flex URL
47472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47474 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
47482 \begin_layout Bibliography
47483 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47484 LatexCommand bibitem
47490 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47493 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
47497 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47499 \begin_inset Newline newline
47503 \begin_inset Flex URL
47506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47508 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
47516 \begin_layout Bibliography
47517 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47518 LatexCommand bibitem
47524 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47527 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
47531 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47533 \begin_inset Newline newline
47537 \begin_inset Flex URL
47540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47542 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
47550 \begin_layout Bibliography
47551 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47552 LatexCommand bibitem
47558 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47561 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
47565 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47566 for Cyrillic languages:
47567 \begin_inset Newline newline
47571 \begin_inset Flex URL
47574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47576 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
47584 \begin_layout Bibliography
47585 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47586 LatexCommand bibitem
47592 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47595 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
47599 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47601 \begin_inset Newline newline
47605 \begin_inset Flex URL
47608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47610 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
47618 \begin_layout Bibliography
47619 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47620 LatexCommand bibitem
47626 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47629 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
47633 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47635 \begin_inset Newline newline
47639 \begin_inset Flex URL
47642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47644 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
47652 \begin_layout Bibliography
47653 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47654 LatexCommand bibitem
47660 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47663 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
47667 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47669 \begin_inset Newline newline
47673 \begin_inset Flex URL
47676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47678 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
47686 \begin_layout Bibliography
47687 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47688 LatexCommand bibitem
47694 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47697 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
47701 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47703 \begin_inset Newline newline
47707 \begin_inset Flex URL
47710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47712 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
47720 \begin_layout Bibliography
47721 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47722 LatexCommand bibitem
47728 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47731 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
47735 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47737 \begin_inset Newline newline
47741 \begin_inset Flex URL
47744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47746 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
47754 \begin_layout Bibliography
47755 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47756 LatexCommand bibitem
47762 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47765 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
47769 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47771 \begin_inset Newline newline
47775 \begin_inset Flex URL
47778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47780 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
47788 \begin_layout Bibliography
47789 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47790 LatexCommand bibitem
47796 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47799 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
47803 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47805 \begin_inset Newline newline
47809 \begin_inset Flex URL
47812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47814 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
47822 \begin_layout Bibliography
47823 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47824 LatexCommand bibitem
47830 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47833 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
47837 about new features in
47843 \begin_inset Newline newline
47847 \begin_inset Flex URL
47850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47852 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
47860 \begin_layout Standard
47861 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
47868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47895 \begin_inset Note Note
47898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47905 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
47906 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
47907 bibliography is the second one:
47915 \begin_layout Standard
47916 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
47917 LatexCommand bibtex
47918 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
47919 options "biblio/alphadin"
47926 \begin_layout Standard
47927 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47931 \begin_layout Standard
47932 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
47933 LatexCommand printnomenclature
47939 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
47940 LatexCommand printindex